1MRK511311-UEN - en Technical Manual Bay Control REC670 2.0 IEC
1MRK511311-UEN - en Technical Manual Bay Control REC670 2.0 IEC
1MRK511311-UEN - en Technical Manual Bay Control REC670 2.0 IEC
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage
directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of
the IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................35
This manual......................................................................................35
Intended audience............................................................................35
Product documentation.....................................................................36
Product documentation set..........................................................36
Document revision history...........................................................37
Related documents......................................................................38
Document symbols and conventions................................................38
Symbols.......................................................................................38
Document conventions................................................................39
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.......................................40
1
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification................................................................................75
Function block.............................................................................75
Signals.........................................................................................76
Basic part for LED indication module...............................................76
Identification................................................................................76
Function block.............................................................................76
Signals.........................................................................................77
Settings........................................................................................78
Monitored data.............................................................................78
Identification................................................................................78
Function block.............................................................................79
Signals.........................................................................................79
Settings........................................................................................79
Operation principle...........................................................................80
Local HMI....................................................................................80
Display....................................................................................80
LEDs.......................................................................................83
Keypad...................................................................................84
LED..............................................................................................86
Functionality ..........................................................................86
Status LEDs...........................................................................86
Indication LEDs......................................................................86
Function keys..............................................................................94
Functionality ..........................................................................94
Operation principle.................................................................94
2
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals.......................................................................................103
Settings......................................................................................104
Monitored data...........................................................................104
Operation principle....................................................................104
Technical data...........................................................................105
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC .....................................................................................105
Identification..............................................................................106
Functionality..............................................................................106
Function block...........................................................................107
Signals.......................................................................................107
Settings......................................................................................109
Monitored data...........................................................................114
Operation principle....................................................................115
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................119
Technical data...........................................................................120
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................121
Identification..............................................................................121
Functionality..............................................................................121
Function block...........................................................................121
Signals.......................................................................................121
Settings......................................................................................122
Monitored data...........................................................................122
Operation principle....................................................................122
Technical data...........................................................................123
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................123
Identification..............................................................................123
Functionality..............................................................................124
Function block...........................................................................124
Signals.......................................................................................124
Settings......................................................................................126
Monitored data...........................................................................131
Operation principle....................................................................132
Operating quantity within the function..................................132
Internal polarizing.................................................................133
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................134
Directional detection for earth fault function.........................134
Base quantities within the protection....................................135
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................135
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................135
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................136
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................139
3
Technical Manual
Table of contents
4
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals.......................................................................................179
Settings......................................................................................180
Monitored data...........................................................................181
Operation principle....................................................................181
Technical data...........................................................................185
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output
CCRBRF ........................................................................................185
Identification..............................................................................185
Functionality..............................................................................185
Function block...........................................................................186
Signals.......................................................................................186
Settings......................................................................................187
Monitored data...........................................................................188
Operation principle....................................................................188
Technical data...........................................................................191
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................191
Identification..............................................................................191
Functionality..............................................................................192
Function block...........................................................................192
Signals.......................................................................................192
Settings......................................................................................192
Monitored data...........................................................................193
Operation principle....................................................................193
Technical data...........................................................................194
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC...........................................194
Identification..............................................................................195
Functionality..............................................................................195
Function block...........................................................................195
Signals.......................................................................................196
Settings......................................................................................196
Monitored data...........................................................................197
Operation principle....................................................................197
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................200
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................200
Technical data...........................................................................200
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................200
Identification..............................................................................201
Functionality..............................................................................201
Function block...........................................................................202
Signals.......................................................................................202
Settings......................................................................................203
Monitored data...........................................................................204
Operation principle....................................................................204
5
Technical Manual
Table of contents
6
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................235
Monitored data...........................................................................236
Operation principle....................................................................236
Measured quantities.............................................................236
Base quantities.....................................................................236
Overcurrent protection..........................................................236
Logic diagram.......................................................................238
Undervoltage protection.......................................................238
Technical data...........................................................................239
7
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Operation principle....................................................................272
Measurement principle.........................................................272
Time delay............................................................................272
Blocking................................................................................278
Design..................................................................................278
Technical data...........................................................................279
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................280
Identification..............................................................................280
Functionality..............................................................................280
Function block...........................................................................281
Signals.......................................................................................281
Settings......................................................................................281
Monitored data...........................................................................282
Operation principle....................................................................282
Technical data...........................................................................284
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................285
Identification..............................................................................285
Functionality..............................................................................285
Function block...........................................................................285
Signals.......................................................................................285
Settings......................................................................................286
Operation principle....................................................................286
Technical data...........................................................................288
8
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................296
Monitored data...........................................................................297
Operation principle....................................................................297
Measurement principle.........................................................297
Time delay............................................................................297
Blocking................................................................................298
Design..................................................................................298
Technical data...........................................................................299
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................299
Identification..............................................................................299
Functionality..............................................................................299
Function block...........................................................................300
Signals.......................................................................................300
Settings......................................................................................300
Monitored data...........................................................................301
Operation principle....................................................................301
Measurement principle.........................................................301
Time delay............................................................................301
Blocking................................................................................302
Design..................................................................................302
Technical data...........................................................................303
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR........304
Identification..............................................................................304
Functionality .............................................................................304
Function block ..........................................................................304
Signals.......................................................................................305
Settings......................................................................................305
Monitored data...........................................................................306
Operation principle....................................................................306
9
Technical Manual
Table of contents
10
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data...........................................................................367
Section 13 Control..........................................................................369
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN......................................................................................369
Identification..............................................................................369
Functionality..............................................................................369
Function block...........................................................................370
Signals.......................................................................................370
Settings......................................................................................372
Monitored data...........................................................................375
Operation principle....................................................................375
Basic functionality.................................................................375
Logic diagrams.....................................................................376
Technical data...........................................................................387
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation
SMBRREC .....................................................................................388
Identification..............................................................................388
Functionality..............................................................................388
Function block...........................................................................389
Signals.......................................................................................389
Settings......................................................................................391
Operation principle....................................................................392
Logic Diagrams....................................................................392
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................393
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................393
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a
reclosing cycle......................................................................393
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............394
Long trip signal.....................................................................395
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................401
Technical data...........................................................................404
Interlocking ....................................................................................405
Functionality..............................................................................405
Operation principle....................................................................405
Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................408
Identification.........................................................................408
Functionality.........................................................................408
Function block......................................................................409
Signals..................................................................................409
Logic diagram.......................................................................409
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................410
Identification.........................................................................410
Functionality.........................................................................410
11
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block......................................................................410
Logic diagram.......................................................................411
Signals..................................................................................411
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................411
Identification.........................................................................411
Functionality.........................................................................411
Function block......................................................................412
Logic diagram.......................................................................413
Signals..................................................................................414
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................415
Identification.........................................................................416
Functionality.........................................................................416
Function block......................................................................416
Logic diagram.......................................................................417
Signals..................................................................................417
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................418
Identification.........................................................................418
Functionality.........................................................................419
Function block......................................................................420
Logic diagram.......................................................................421
Signals..................................................................................423
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................426
Identification.........................................................................426
Functionality.........................................................................426
Function blocks....................................................................427
Logic diagrams.....................................................................429
Signals..................................................................................434
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................438
Identification.........................................................................438
Functionality.........................................................................438
Logic diagrams.....................................................................440
Function block......................................................................443
Signals..................................................................................444
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................448
Identification.........................................................................448
Functionality.........................................................................448
Function block......................................................................449
Logic diagram.......................................................................450
Signals..................................................................................455
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................457
Identification.........................................................................458
Functionality.........................................................................458
Function block......................................................................459
12
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Logic diagram.......................................................................460
Signals..................................................................................461
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................463
Identification.........................................................................463
Functionality.........................................................................463
Function block......................................................................463
Logic diagram.......................................................................464
Signals..................................................................................464
Apparatus control APC...................................................................464
Functionality..............................................................................464
Operation principle....................................................................465
Error handling............................................................................466
Bay control QCBAY...................................................................469
Functionality.........................................................................469
Function block......................................................................469
Signals..................................................................................469
Settings................................................................................470
Operation principle...............................................................470
Local/Remote switch.................................................................472
Function block......................................................................472
Signals..................................................................................473
Settings................................................................................474
Operation principle...............................................................474
Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................475
Functionality ........................................................................476
Function block......................................................................476
Signals..................................................................................476
Settings................................................................................478
Operation principle...............................................................478
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................483
Functionality ........................................................................483
Function block......................................................................483
Signals..................................................................................484
Settings................................................................................485
Operation principle...............................................................485
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................489
Functionality ........................................................................489
Function block......................................................................489
Signals..................................................................................490
Settings................................................................................491
Operation principle...............................................................491
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................495
Functionality.........................................................................495
13
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block......................................................................495
Signals..................................................................................496
Settings................................................................................497
Operation principle...............................................................497
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................499
Functionality.........................................................................499
Function block......................................................................499
Signals..................................................................................500
Settings................................................................................501
Operation principle...............................................................501
Voltage control................................................................................503
Identification..............................................................................503
Functionality..............................................................................504
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and
TR8ATCC .................................................................................504
Operation principle...............................................................504
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........................................................516
Operation principle...............................................................516
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.............................................................520
Function block...........................................................................524
Signals.......................................................................................527
Settings......................................................................................534
Monitored data...........................................................................542
Operation principle....................................................................543
Technical data...........................................................................544
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC....................................................................545
Identification..............................................................................545
Functionality..............................................................................546
Function block...........................................................................546
Signals.......................................................................................546
Settings......................................................................................548
Monitored data...........................................................................548
Operation principle....................................................................548
Graphical display..................................................................549
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................550
Identification..............................................................................550
Functionality..............................................................................551
Function block...........................................................................551
Signals.......................................................................................551
Settings......................................................................................552
Operation principle....................................................................552
14
Technical Manual
Table of contents
15
Technical Manual
Table of contents
16
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 15 Logic.............................................................................603
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................603
Identification..............................................................................603
Functionality..............................................................................603
Function block...........................................................................603
Signals.......................................................................................604
Settings......................................................................................605
Operation principle....................................................................605
Logic diagram.......................................................................607
Technical data...........................................................................610
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC...........................................................610
Identification..............................................................................610
Functionality..............................................................................611
Function block...........................................................................611
Signals.......................................................................................611
Settings......................................................................................613
Operation principle....................................................................613
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................614
Identification..............................................................................614
Functionality..............................................................................614
Function block...........................................................................615
Signals.......................................................................................615
Settings......................................................................................616
Operation principle....................................................................616
Identification...................................................................................616
Functionality..............................................................................616
Function block...........................................................................617
Operation principle....................................................................617
Signals.......................................................................................617
Settings......................................................................................618
Identification...................................................................................618
Functionality..............................................................................618
Function block...........................................................................619
Operation principle....................................................................619
Signals.......................................................................................619
Settings......................................................................................620
Configurable logic blocks................................................................620
Functionality..............................................................................620
Inverter function block INV........................................................622
Function block......................................................................622
Signals..................................................................................623
17
Technical Manual
Table of contents
18
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals..................................................................................632
Inverter function block INVERTERQT.......................................632
Function block......................................................................633
Signals..................................................................................633
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................633
Function block......................................................................633
Signals..................................................................................633
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................634
Function block......................................................................634
Signals..................................................................................634
Settings................................................................................635
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................635
Function block......................................................................635
Signals..................................................................................635
Settings................................................................................636
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT.............................636
Signals..................................................................................636
Settings................................................................................637
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................637
Signals..................................................................................637
Settings................................................................................637
InvalidLogic INVALIDQT............................................................637
Function block......................................................................638
Signals..................................................................................638
Single indication signal combining function block
INDCOMBSPQT........................................................................639
Signals..................................................................................639
Function block...........................................................................640
Signals..................................................................................640
Technical data................................................................................641
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................643
Identification..............................................................................643
Functionality..............................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................643
Signals.......................................................................................643
Settings......................................................................................644
Operation principle....................................................................644
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................644
Identification..............................................................................644
Function block...........................................................................645
Signals.......................................................................................645
Monitored data...........................................................................646
Settings......................................................................................646
19
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Operation principle....................................................................646
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation BTIGAPC................................................................647
Identification..............................................................................647
Functionality..............................................................................647
Function block...........................................................................647
Signals.......................................................................................648
Settings......................................................................................648
Monitored data...........................................................................648
Operation principle....................................................................648
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................650
Identification..............................................................................650
Functionality..............................................................................650
Function block...........................................................................650
Signals.......................................................................................650
Setting parameters....................................................................651
Operation principle....................................................................651
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation ITBGAPC................................................................652
Identification..............................................................................652
Functionality..............................................................................653
Function block...........................................................................653
Signals.......................................................................................653
Settings......................................................................................654
Operation principle....................................................................654
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................655
Identification..............................................................................655
Functionality..............................................................................656
Function block...........................................................................656
Signals.......................................................................................657
Settings......................................................................................657
Operation principle....................................................................657
Operation Accuracy..............................................................659
Memory storage...................................................................659
Technical data...........................................................................659
Section 16 Monitoring.....................................................................661
Measurements................................................................................661
Identification..............................................................................661
Functionality..............................................................................661
Function block...........................................................................663
Signals.......................................................................................665
Settings......................................................................................668
20
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Monitored data...........................................................................679
Operation principle....................................................................683
Measurement supervision....................................................683
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................687
Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................692
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU..............................................................693
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI..................................................................................693
Technical data...........................................................................693
Analog inputs..................................................................................695
Introduction................................................................................695
Function block...........................................................................696
Signals.......................................................................................696
Settings......................................................................................698
Monitored data...........................................................................705
Operation principle....................................................................706
Gas medium supervision SSIMG...................................................707
Identification..............................................................................707
Functionality..............................................................................707
Function block...........................................................................708
Signals.......................................................................................708
Settings......................................................................................709
Operation principle....................................................................709
Technical data...........................................................................710
Liquid medium supervision SSIML.................................................710
Identification..............................................................................710
Functionality..............................................................................711
Function block...........................................................................711
Signals.......................................................................................711
Settings......................................................................................712
Operation principle....................................................................712
Technical data...........................................................................713
Breaker monitoring SSCBR............................................................713
Identification..............................................................................713
Functionality..............................................................................714
Function block...........................................................................714
Signals.......................................................................................714
Settings......................................................................................715
Monitored data...........................................................................717
Operation principle....................................................................717
Circuit breaker contact travel time........................................719
Circuit breaker status...........................................................720
Remaining life of circuit breaker...........................................721
21
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Accumulated energy.............................................................722
Circuit breaker operation cycles...........................................723
Circuit breaker operation monitoring....................................724
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring.............................725
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication................................726
Technical data...........................................................................726
Event function EVENT....................................................................726
Identification..............................................................................727
Functionality..............................................................................727
Function block...........................................................................727
Signals.......................................................................................727
Settings......................................................................................728
Operation principle....................................................................730
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................731
Identification..............................................................................732
Functionality..............................................................................732
Function block...........................................................................733
Signals.......................................................................................734
Settings......................................................................................739
Monitored data...........................................................................778
Operation principle....................................................................782
Technical data...........................................................................789
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP.....................................790
Identification..............................................................................790
Functionality..............................................................................790
Function block...........................................................................791
Signals.......................................................................................791
Settings......................................................................................792
Operation principle....................................................................792
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................793
Identification..............................................................................793
Functionality..............................................................................793
Function block...........................................................................793
Signals.......................................................................................794
Operation principle....................................................................794
Fault locator LMBRFLO..................................................................794
Identification..............................................................................794
Functionality..............................................................................795
Function block...........................................................................795
Signals.......................................................................................795
Settings......................................................................................796
Monitored data...........................................................................797
Operation principle....................................................................797
22
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Measuring Principle..............................................................798
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....798
The non-compensated impedance model............................802
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................803
Technical data...........................................................................803
Limit counter L4UFCNT..................................................................803
Identification..............................................................................803
Identification.........................................................................803
Functionality..............................................................................803
Operation principle....................................................................804
Design..................................................................................804
Reporting..............................................................................805
Function block...........................................................................805
Signals.......................................................................................806
Settings......................................................................................806
Monitored data...........................................................................807
Technical data...........................................................................807
Section 17 Metering.......................................................................809
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT.........................................................809
Identification..............................................................................809
Functionality..............................................................................809
Function block...........................................................................809
Signals.......................................................................................810
Settings......................................................................................810
Monitored data...........................................................................811
Operation principle....................................................................811
Technical data...........................................................................813
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR......................................................................................813
Identification..............................................................................813
Functionality..............................................................................813
Function block...........................................................................814
Signals.......................................................................................814
Settings......................................................................................815
Monitored data...........................................................................816
Operation principle....................................................................817
Technical data...........................................................................820
Technical data......................................................................820
23
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Functionality..............................................................................821
Communication interfaces and protocols..................................822
Settings......................................................................................822
Technical data...........................................................................823
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...............................................................823
Functionality.........................................................................823
Function block......................................................................823
Signals..................................................................................824
Settings................................................................................824
Monitored data.....................................................................824
Operation principle...............................................................825
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC...................................................................................825
Functionality.........................................................................826
Function block......................................................................826
Signals..................................................................................826
Settings................................................................................826
Monitored data.....................................................................827
Operation principle...............................................................827
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..............827
Functionality.........................................................................828
Function block......................................................................828
Signals..................................................................................828
Settings................................................................................828
Monitored data.....................................................................829
Principle of operation............................................................829
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.....................................831
Introduction................................................................................831
Function block...........................................................................831
Signals.......................................................................................831
Output signals......................................................................831
Settings......................................................................................834
Monitored data...........................................................................837
Operation principle....................................................................838
Technical data...........................................................................841
LON communication protocol.........................................................841
Functionality..............................................................................841
Settings......................................................................................842
Operation principle....................................................................842
Technical data...........................................................................860
SPA communication protocol.........................................................860
Functionality..............................................................................860
Design.......................................................................................860
24
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................861
Operation principle....................................................................861
Communication ports...........................................................869
Technical data...........................................................................869
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................869
Introduction................................................................................869
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS...........................869
Functionality.........................................................................869
Identification.........................................................................870
Function block......................................................................870
Signals..................................................................................870
Settings................................................................................871
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR..........................................................................871
Functionality.........................................................................871
Identification.........................................................................872
Function block......................................................................872
Signals..................................................................................872
Settings................................................................................873
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR......873
Functionality.........................................................................873
Identification.........................................................................873
Function block......................................................................874
Signals..................................................................................874
Settings................................................................................874
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF...........874
Functionality.........................................................................874
Identification.........................................................................874
Function block......................................................................875
Signals..................................................................................875
Settings................................................................................875
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT...........................................................................875
Functionality.........................................................................875
Identification.........................................................................875
Function block......................................................................876
Signals..................................................................................876
Settings................................................................................877
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED..................................877
Functionality.........................................................................877
Identification.........................................................................878
Function block......................................................................878
Signals..................................................................................878
Settings................................................................................878
25
Technical Manual
Table of contents
26
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals..................................................................................887
Settings................................................................................888
Operation principle ...................................................................888
General.................................................................................888
Communication ports...........................................................898
Technical data...........................................................................899
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................899
Functionality..............................................................................899
Function block...........................................................................900
Signals.......................................................................................900
Settings......................................................................................902
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................903
Function block...........................................................................903
Signals.......................................................................................903
Settings......................................................................................904
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV..............................................................................905
Identification..............................................................................905
Functionality..............................................................................905
Function block...........................................................................905
Signals.......................................................................................905
Settings......................................................................................906
Operation principle ...................................................................906
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV.............................................................................906
Identification..............................................................................906
Functionality..............................................................................906
Function block...........................................................................907
Signals.......................................................................................907
Settings......................................................................................907
Operation principle ...................................................................907
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV.............................................................................908
Identification..............................................................................908
Functionality..............................................................................908
Function block...........................................................................908
Signals.......................................................................................908
Settings......................................................................................909
Operation principle ...................................................................909
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV..............................................................................909
Identification..............................................................................909
Functionality..............................................................................910
27
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................910
Signals.......................................................................................910
Settings......................................................................................910
Operation principle ...................................................................910
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF......................................................................911
Identification..............................................................................911
Functionality..............................................................................911
Settings......................................................................................912
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV..........912
Identification..............................................................................912
Functionality..............................................................................912
Function block...........................................................................912
Signals.......................................................................................913
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND..........................................913
Functionality..............................................................................913
Design.......................................................................................913
General.................................................................................913
Function block...........................................................................914
Signals.......................................................................................914
Settings......................................................................................916
Operation principle....................................................................916
Security events on protocols SECALARM......................................917
Security alarm SECALARM.......................................................917
Signals..................................................................................917
Settings................................................................................917
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.........................................917
Activity logging ACTIVLOG.......................................................917
Settings......................................................................................917
28
Technical Manual
Table of contents
29
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block...........................................................................956
Signals.......................................................................................956
Settings......................................................................................957
Operation principle....................................................................957
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK...................................................958
Functionality..............................................................................958
Function block...........................................................................959
Signals.......................................................................................959
Settings......................................................................................959
Operation principle ...................................................................959
Test mode functionality TEST........................................................960
Functionality..............................................................................960
Function block...........................................................................960
Signals.......................................................................................960
Settings......................................................................................961
Operation principle ...................................................................961
IED identifiers.................................................................................963
Functionality..............................................................................963
Settings .....................................................................................964
Product information........................................................................964
Functionality..............................................................................964
Settings .....................................................................................964
Factory defined settings............................................................965
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI..............................................965
Functionality..............................................................................965
Function block...........................................................................966
Signals.......................................................................................966
Operation principle....................................................................967
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO .........................................967
Functionality..............................................................................967
Function block...........................................................................967
Signals.......................................................................................967
Operation principle....................................................................968
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI..................................................968
Functionality..............................................................................968
Function block...........................................................................968
Signals.......................................................................................969
Operation principle....................................................................969
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI.............................................969
Functionality..............................................................................969
Frequency values......................................................................970
Function block...........................................................................971
Signals.......................................................................................971
30
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings......................................................................................972
Operation principle ...................................................................974
Global base values GBASVAL.......................................................975
Identification..............................................................................975
Functionality..............................................................................975
Settings......................................................................................975
Primary system values PRIMVAL...................................................975
Identification..............................................................................975
Functionality..............................................................................976
Settings......................................................................................976
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM..............................................976
Functionality..............................................................................976
Function block...........................................................................976
Signals.......................................................................................976
Settings......................................................................................977
Operation principle ...................................................................977
Denial of service DOS....................................................................978
Functionality .............................................................................978
Function blocks..........................................................................978
Signals.......................................................................................978
Settings......................................................................................979
Monitored data...........................................................................979
Operation principle....................................................................981
31
Technical Manual
Table of contents
32
Technical Manual
Table of contents
33
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 22 Labels.........................................................................1063
Labels on IED...............................................................................1063
Section 26 Glossary.....................................................................1109
Glossary.......................................................................................1109
34
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.
35
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using
the various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of
protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The
manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters
are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
36
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has
been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring,
controlling and setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify
disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to
determine the cause of a fault.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points
specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the
corresponding communication protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical
reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and
during normal service.
37
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
1.4.1 Symbols
38
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
39
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts
and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in
another diagram have the suffix -cont.
40
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
41
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
42
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
43
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
44
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction
45
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction
46
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance 0-6 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 6-A07
differential protection
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
67N2) overcurrent protection
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
negative phase
sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional 0-6 1-C16 1C16 1-C16 1-C16
residual overcurrent
and power protection
Table continues on next page
47
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
protection
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
overvoltage protection
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential 0-6 2 2 2 2
protection
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2 1 1 1 2
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
frequency protection
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time 0-12
accumulation protection
Table continues on next page
48
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and 0-9 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
voltage protection
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check 0-6, 0-2 1 1 2 3
and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-6, 0-4 1-H04 1-H04 2-H05 3-H06
APC8 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 1 1 1
max 8 apparatuses (1CB) incl.
interlocking
APC15 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 1 1
max 15 apparatuses (2CBs) incl.
interlocking
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, 1 1
max 30 apparatuses (6CBs) incl.
interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap 0-4 1-H11 1-H11 1-H11 2-H16
changer, single control
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap 0-4 1-H15 1-H15 1-H15 2-H18
changer, parallel control
Table continues on next page
49
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
50
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic blocks 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28
PULSETIMER, 0 0 0 0
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0-1
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQ
T,
RSMEMORYQ
T,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQ
T, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQ
T,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic package 0-1
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow
supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU,
CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for service value 1 1 1 1 1
presentation of secondary analog
inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
Table continues on next page
51
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (A31)
REC670 (B30)
REC670
52
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
2.4 Communication
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
ADE LON communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
HORZCOMM Network variables via 1 1 1 1 1
LON
PROTOCOL Operation selection 1 1 1 1 1
between SPA and IEC
60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for 1 1 1 1 1
RS485
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1 1
general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1 1
general TCP protocol
CHSERRS48 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
5 communication protocol
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
CH2TCP, communication protocol
CH3TCP,
CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and 1 1 1 1 1
EIA-485 communication
protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication protocol
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for 1 1 1 1 1
TCP/IP and EIA-485
communication protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting 1 1 1 1 1
function for IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLK Horizontal 59 59 59 59 59
RCV communication via
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINR Goose binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
CV
GOOSEDPRC GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64 64
V receive a double point
value
Table continues on next page
53
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670
54
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)
REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670
55
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions
56
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions
57
Technical Manual
58
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
3.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.
59
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
3.3 Signals
60
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
61
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
3.4 Settings
62
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
63
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
65
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
66
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
67
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
68
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
69
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)
70
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs
en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.
71
Technical Manual
72
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 4
Binary input and output modules
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a
millisecond when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A
new debounced binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the
set DebounceTime value and the debounced input value is high or when the time
counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default setting of
DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which
the counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down
to 0 again.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked.
The input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below
the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3 Settings
73
Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Binary input and output modules
74
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.1.2 Settings
Table 22: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes
5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
75
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN
5.2.3 Signals
Table 23: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15
76
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
5.3.3 Signals
Table 25: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
77
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.3.4 Settings
Table 28: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance
5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5
78
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block
for every function button.
5.4.3 Signals
Table 31: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
5.4.4 Settings
Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
79
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V1 EN
5.4.1.1 Display
80
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
1 2
3 IEC13000063-2-en.vsd
4
IEC13000063 V2 EN
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too
long to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is
indicated with three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in
and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with
PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar
appears on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if
it does not fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
81
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000045-2-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V2 EN
The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.
The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.
IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN
The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.
Three alarm LED pages are available.
82
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN
The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have
dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains.
5.4.1.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start
and Trip.
There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related
to each three-color LED are divided into three pages.
There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority,
with red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one
page there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another
page there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
Information pages for the alarm LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED
is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up / Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED.
Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED
panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any page
is lit. If there are un-acknowledged alarm LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks.
83
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
To acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to
description of this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.
5.4.1.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.
IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
GUID-0C172139-80E0-45B1-8A3F-1EAE9557A52D V2 EN
84
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
6 20
21
7 22
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
IEC13000249-1-en.vsd
GUID-77E71883-0B80-4647-8205-EE56723511D2 V2 EN
Figure 13: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port
85
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.4.2 LED
5.4.2.1 Functionality
The function blocks HMI_LED and HMI_LEDS controls and supplies information
about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is
selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a HMI_LEDS
function block, that controls the color and the operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting
or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used
as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow
and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate
that a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode
(flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.
Operating modes
Collecting mode
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
86
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function
is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset
is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED
follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each
LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset
function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement
are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type
and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.
87
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority
is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated
in parallel is shown in Figure 16.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if
88
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 19.
89
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
90
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color
according to Figure 22.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
91
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN
92
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN
93
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.4.3.1 Functionality
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can
control a binary signal.
Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input
has been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
94
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Input value
Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN
Setting PULSED
In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this
time the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function
block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since
the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the
output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.
Input value
Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN
Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this
function block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when
high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set
to off.
95
Technical Manual
96
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection
6.1.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
6.1.2 Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used
when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme
are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor
which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN
97
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Differential protection
6.1.4 Signals
Table 35: HZPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
6.1.5 Settings
Table 37: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms
98
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection
RS
3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5
2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN
99
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Differential protection
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there
is no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential
protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential
relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup
value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay
set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected
in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case
of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated
current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the
measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current
transformer secondary winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however
it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to
be set above this false operating voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 32.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected
to it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to
the HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value
for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the
measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS
value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete
removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault
current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip
thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms
within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a service value
from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.
100
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection
IEC05000301 V1 EN
Figure 32: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF
101
Technical Manual
102
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
7.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN
7.1.4 Signals
103
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.1.5 Settings
104
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this
phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn
(n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
105
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN
7.2.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually
106
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
IEC06000187-2-en.vsd
IEC06000187 V2 EN
7.2.4 Signals
Table 47: OC4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
Table continues on next page
107
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
108
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.2.5 Settings
Table 49: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page
109
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
110
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
111
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
112
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
113
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
114
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740-2-en.vsd
IEC05000740 V2 EN
115
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component
and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If
RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in
addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from
the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected
current values are fed to OC4PTOC.
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to
the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the
local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set
restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as
current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for
the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN (Equation 1)
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 2)
Table continues on next page
116
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 3)
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 4)
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 5)
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 6)
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition
seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.
117
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
118
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b
AND
STx
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008 V1 EN
119
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
IEC13000014-1-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V1 EN
120
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
7.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line
at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual
current from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the
current from a separate current input.
IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN
7.3.4 Signals
121
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.3.5 Settings
122
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC IN 51N/67N
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V1 EN
123
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.
EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking
the input from neutral CT
IEC06000424-2-en.vsd
IEC06000424 V3 EN
7.4.4 Signals
124
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
125
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.4.5 Settings
126
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
127
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
128
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
129
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
130
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
131
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
132
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual
current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
133
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance
in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the
following formula:
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(Forward/Reverse).
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:
Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select
either zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to
the same source as I3P input.
134
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:
135
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 41.
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int t
OR
HarmRestrainx=Off
DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC10000008-4-en.vsd
IEC10000008 V4 EN
Figure 41: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x =
step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.
136
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
lop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 42, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg
RCA
65 Upol = -3U 0
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN
137
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional
UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-5-en.vsd
IEC07000067 V5 EN
Figure 43: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
138
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:
If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output
signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function
block is applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers
in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a
small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer.
Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short
period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets.
If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:
139
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 44.
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
q-1
t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
IEC13000015 V2 EN
Figure 44: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate
either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there
is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing
sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations.
The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation
is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
140
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse.
The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position
open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a
residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give
a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200
ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-
Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance
protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-
Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF
Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2
StepForSOTF
STIN3
OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime
tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime
OR
Open
Close OR
t4U
Close command
ActUnderTime
AND
STIN4
IEC06000643-3-en.vsd
IEC06000643 V3 EN
Figure 45: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
141
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 46:
signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element
harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRIP
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
IEC06000376-2-en.vsd
IEC06000376 V2 EN
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and
table 896, table 897 and table 898 table 898
Second harmonic restrain (5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of Ir
operation
Table continues on next page
142
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
I2
overcurrent protection
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN
7.5.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.
143
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN
7.5.4 Signals
Table 68: NS4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
Table continues on next page
144
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.5.5 Settings
Table 70: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page
145
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
146
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
147
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
148
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
149
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
150
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
1
I2 = (
IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2
)
3
EQUATION2266 V2 EN (Equation 12)
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the
negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is
used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to
true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:
1
UPol = -U 2 = - (UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing
151
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined
by setting UpolMin.
Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:
152
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime TRx
|IOP| AND AND
a OR tx
a>b
ENMULTx b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC09000683-3-en.vsd
IEC09000683 V2 EN
Figure 48: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
153
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 42, to determine the direction of the fault.
Reverse
Area
AngleRCA Upol=-U2
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN
154
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin
IPolMin
t
Iop
UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN
Figure 50: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step
155
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and
table 896, table 897 and table table 898
898
Minimum operate current for (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
steps 1 - 4 1.0% of I at I > Ir
156
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection
7.6.2 Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following:
157
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Phase
currents
IN
Phase-
ground
voltages
UN
IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN
Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
158
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN
7.6.4 Signals
Table 75: SDEPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
159
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.6.5 Settings
Table 77: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
Table continues on next page
160
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
161
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-
processor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
162
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
3I0
j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cosj
IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN
Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90
3I0
3I0 cos
3U0
IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN
163
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 58.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip
from this sub-function has definite time delay.
RCADir = 0o
3I0
Operate area
j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cos j
ROADir
IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN
164
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
RCADir = 0
Operate area
-3U0 =Uref
Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation
en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN
For trip, the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.
165
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.
RCADir = 0
ROADir = 80
Operate area
3I0
-3U0
IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN
For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle shall
be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 58.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
166
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the
inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is
shown in Figure 58.
167
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t
OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>
UNRel>
& &
tDef
INCosPhi> t
tDef TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir
DirMode = Forward
DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd
IEC06000653 V4 EN
Figure 58: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection
168
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
169
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius
7.7.2 Functionality
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is LCPTTR (Celsius) or
LFPTTR (Fahrenheit).
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after
operation are presented.
170
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN
LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET
IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN
7.7.4 Signals
Table 83: LCPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter
171
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.7.5 Settings
Table 87: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup
172
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
173
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
2
I
Q final = Tref
I ref
EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 14)
where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and
174
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Dt
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-
EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 15)
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:
Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 16)
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q - Q
final n
EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 17)
175
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure
signal, TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the
total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
176
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
START
Final Temp > Trip Temp
TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature
AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp
I3P
Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT TRIP
LOCKOUT
Lockout logic
TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR
TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout
IEC09000637-2-en.vsd
IEC09000637 V2 EN
177
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
7.8.2 Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be
damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a
consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will
increase.
178
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the
transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.
Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
IEC06000272_2_en.vsd
IEC06000272 V2 EN
7.8.4 Signals
Table 94: TRPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and
time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
179
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.8.5 Settings
Table 96: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).
180
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat
content) is calculated according to the expression:
2
I
Q final =
I ref
EQUATION1171 V1 EN (Equation 19)
where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current
181
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START
will be activated.
If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN (Equation 20)
Dt
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-
EQUATION1173 V1 EN (Equation 21)
If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN (Equation 22)
Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
-
t
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature
Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:
Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1176 V1 EN (Equation 24)
182
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as
an integer output TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The
output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1177 V1 EN (Equation 25)
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 19.
The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure, TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.
183
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp
S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp
TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip
Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout
IEC05000833-2-en.vsd
IEC05000833 V2 EN
184
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Reset level temperature (1095)% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip
7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
7.9.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
185
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.
IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN
7.9.4 Signals
Table 100: CCRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously
186
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.9.5 Settings
Table 102: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of
1 out of 3 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration
187
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With
the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS
evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication.
The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening,
that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its
time a back-up trip is initiated.
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
188
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
START 30 ms
IEC09000976-1-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V1 EN
IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
Contact
1 Time out L1
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1 CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1
a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b
IEC09000977-1-en.vsd
IEC09000977 V1 EN
189
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1 TRRETL2 TRRET
phases OR
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR
1
OR AND
CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT
IEC09000978-3-en.vsd
IEC09000978 V3 EN
BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2 AND
BFP Started L3
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b
CBFLT
AND
t2
BFP Started L1 Backup Trip L1
t AND
OR
t2MPh
AND t
AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 2 of 3
phases BFP Started L3 tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q t
R SR
AND
IEC09000979-3-en.vsd
IEC09000979 V3 EN
Figure 67: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function
Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.
190
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN
191
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.10.2 Functionality
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line
disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will
mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection
will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers
and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN
7.10.4 Signals
Table 107: STBPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection
7.10.5 Settings
Table 109: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase
192
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the
comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the
release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the
TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output
signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
193
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
BLOCK
TRIP
STIL1 AND
STIL2 OR
STIL3
RELEASE
en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN
194
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
7.11.2 Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN
195
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
7.11.4 Signals
Table 114: CCPDSC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-
closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB
7.11.5 Settings
Table 116: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase
196
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
en05000287.vsd
IEC05000287 V2 EN
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 72.
197
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 73.
198
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN
The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single
phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal
1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external
device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this
binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress
from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:
199
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
200
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN
7.12.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not
to protect the generator itself.
Figure 74 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
201
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN
IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN
7.12.4 Signals
Table 120: GUPPDUP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2
202
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.12.5 Settings
Table 122: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2
203
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
204
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors P
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 126.
205
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.
206
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 36)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
77.
207
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
IEC05000652 V2 EN
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.
208
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN
7.13.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.
Figure 78 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
209
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN
Figure 78: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN
7.13.4 Signals
Table 128: GOPPDOP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2
210
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.13.5 Settings
Table 130: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2
211
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
212
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors P
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 134.
213
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
214
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 46)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
81.
215
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
IEC05000652 V2 EN
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.
216
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46
7.14.2 Functionality
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected,
gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
217
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN
7.14.4 Signals
Table 136: BRCPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
7.14.5 Settings
Table 138: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay
218
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 83
The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.
219
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START
Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP> or
IL3<50%IP>
IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN
Figure 83: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
220
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -
7.15.2 Functionality
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive
power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral
parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations.
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide
protection and supervision features for SCBs.
IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V2 EN
7.15.4 Signals
Table 143: CBPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
Table continues on next page
221
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
222
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.15.5 Settings
Table 145: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationRecIn Off - - On Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
On
IRecnInhibit< 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the
SCB is disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Off - - On Operation over current Off/On
On
IOC> 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Start level for over current operation, %
of IBase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for over current operation
OperationUC Off - - Off Operation under current Off/On
On
IUC< 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Start level for under current operation in
% of IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Time delay for under current operation
OperationQOL Off - - On Operation reactive power over load Off/
On On
QOL> 10 - 900 % 1 130 Start level for reactive power over load in
%
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Off - - On Operation harmonic over load Off/On
On
HOLDTU> 10 - 500 % 1 200 Start value of voltage in % for DT
harmonic voltage overload
tHOLDT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic
voltage overload
HOLIDMTU> 80 - 200 % 1 110 Start value of voltage in % for IDMT
harm. voltage overload
kHOLIDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage
overload IDMT curve
tMaxHOLIDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tMinHOLIDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
223
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block
to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains
the following quantities for every phase:
Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and
1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power
system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current
224
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol
i~
Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This
value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power
system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol
IpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:
i 2
~m
I TRMS = m =1
N
EQUATION2232 V1 EN (Equation 47)
where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m
are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms
current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.
Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary
amperes for every phase from the function.
From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is
calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current
waveform by using the following principal equation:
1
u (t ) = i ( t ) t
C
EQUATION2233 V1 EN (Equation 48)
Where:
u(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads
Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz
in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system
cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform
across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~
Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value
is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system
cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:
225
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
u 2
~m
U TRMS = m =1
N
EQUATION2234 V1 EN (Equation 49)
Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
u~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform
In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with
symbol UTRMS
1000 Q [ MVAr ]
IBase =
3 U [ kV ]
EQUATION2235 V1 EN (Equation 50)
Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
U[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV
Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed.
Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent
for every phase from the function.
Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the
function for every phase as given by the following equation:
Q =U TRMS I TRMS
226
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
UTRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit
Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the
capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 85.
Undercurrent
I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit
IEC09000746.vsd
IEC09000746 V1 EN
Figure 85: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one
phase
This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power
system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live
network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the
IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is
energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 86.
227
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecnInhibit<
CAPDISC
Phx
NOT
IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN
Figure 86: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all
three phases
When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will
be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to
inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal
logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 87.
CAPDISC
CAPDISC
_ Ph1
Z-2
en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN
The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive
current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the
preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is
compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of
the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The
signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase
will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for
the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 88.
228
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
IOC> b TROC
AND t AND
OperationOC=On
STOC
BLKTR
BLKOC
BLOCK OR
IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN
Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the
rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too
low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value
from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the
current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function
will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current
falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for
this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor
bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by
a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 89.
IPeakRMS
a
b>a
IUC< b
tUC
AND t
AND TRUC
OperationUC=On
BLKUC
STUC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC
BLKTR
en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN
Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load
conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two
229
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based
on Definite Time (DT) delay.
IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in
figure 90, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS
voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active
until the value falls below the reset value.
2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]
2.1
1.9
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Operate Time [s]
IEC08000352-1-en.vsd
IEC08000352 V1 EN
Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI
standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:
1. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is
proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times
will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 90 and table 148)
2. Between the seven main points in table 148, the operate time is calculate by
using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage
condition
4. By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for
minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be
fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured
230
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent
pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.
Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank
energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th
harmonic.
The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 91:
STHDTLx
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOLDTU> b
tHOLDT
t
OperationHOL=On AND
OR TRHOL
AND
BLKHOL
BLOCK
OR OR STHOL
BLKTR
OperationHOL=On AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b kHOLIDMT IDMT
HOLIDMTU> b
tMaxHOLIDMT
STHIDMLx
tMinHOLIDMT ST
UPeakRMS [pu]
IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN
Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from
reactive power overload conditions.
The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power
input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The
reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power
value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start
signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The
internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 92.
231
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
Q [pu]
a
a>b
QOL> b
tQOL
t
OperationQOL=On AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR
BLKQOL
STQOL
BLOCK
OR
en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN
232
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection
7.16.2 Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used
either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
voltage controlled/restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with
undervoltage seal-in.
233
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
IEC12000184-1-en.vsd
IEC12000184 V1 EN
7.16.4 Signals
Table 150: VRPVOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function
234
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
7.16.5 Settings
Table 152: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse
Definite Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage
in % of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase
235
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is higher than the set level.
236
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN
Figure 94: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
StartCurr
VDepFact * StartCurr
UHighLimit UBase
IEC10000124-2-en.vsd
IEC10000124 V2 EN
Figure 95: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
237
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
DEF time
selected
TROC
OR
MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b
StartCurr
X Inverse
Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature
MinPh-PhVoltage
IEC10000214-1-en.vsd
IEC10000214 V1 EN
DEF time
selected TRUV
MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt
Operation_UV=On
BLKUV
IEC10000213-1-en.vsd
IEC10000213 V1 EN
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.
238
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection
The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
239
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection
240
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN
8.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
241
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN
8.1.4 Signals
Table 157: UV2PTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
242
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.5 Settings
Table 159: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page
243
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
244
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
245
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve
k
t=
Un < -U
Un <
EQUATION1431 V2 EN (Equation 54)
246
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
Un < - U
32 - 0.5
Un <
EQUATION1432 V2 EN (Equation 55)
kA
t= p
+D
Un < - U
B -C
Un <
EQUATION1433 V2 EN (Equation 56)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un<
down to Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 57)
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3
"Inverse characteristics".
247
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
IEC12000186-1-en.vsd
IEC12000186 V1 EN
Figure 99: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it
should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 100 and figure 101.
248
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd
IEC05000010 V4 EN
Figure 100: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
249
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd
IEC05000011 V3 EN
Figure 101: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
102. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
250
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
ST1
U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND
IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN
251
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN
8.1.7.3 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 105. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
252
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN
8.1.7.4 Design
253
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN
254
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN
255
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
8.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN
8.2.4 Signals
Table 164: OV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
256
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.5 Settings
Table 166: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page
257
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
258
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
259
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve
k
t=
U - Un >
Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 60)
260
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 61)
k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
Un >
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN (Equation 62)
kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 63)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 64)
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 108. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
261
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
IEC05000016-2-en.vsd
IEC05000016 V2 EN
Figure 108: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the
measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for
each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a
high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time.
262
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd
IEC09000055 V2 EN
Figure 109: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
263
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd
IEC05000020 V3 EN
Figure 110: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
111. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
(where n means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.
264
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN
Figure 111: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN
Figure 112: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
265
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN
8.2.7.3 Blocking
8.2.7.4 Design
266
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000013-2-en.vsd
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN
267
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
268
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN
8.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN
8.3.4 Signals
Table 171: ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
Table continues on next page
269
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
8.3.5 Settings
Table 173: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page
270
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
271
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
272
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve
k
t=
U - Un >
Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 65)
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 66)
k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U>
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 67)
kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 68)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 69)
273
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 109 and figure 110.
274
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd
IEC09000055 V2 EN
Figure 116: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
275
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd
IEC05000020 V3 EN
Figure 117: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
118. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
276
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN
Figure 118: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN
277
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN
8.3.7.3 Blocking
8.3.7.4 Design
278
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR
IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN
279
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60
8.4.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages
from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step. Alternatively, it can be used as voltage differential protection
(VDCPTOV) for shunt capacitor banks.
280
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN
8.4.4 Signals
Table 178: VDCPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
8.4.5 Settings
Table 180: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
Table continues on next page
281
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
282
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function SDDRFUF.
283
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL3>
AND
AND START
UDAlarmL1>
AND
UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM
UDAlarmL3>
AND
U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND
U1<L3 AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382-2.vsd
IEC06000382 V3 EN
284
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27
8.5.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer
than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN
8.5.4 Signals
Table 185: LOVPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision
285
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
8.5.5 Settings
Table 187: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay
LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.
286
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes
START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t
STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&
tBlock
>1 t
IEC07000089_2_en.vsd
IEC07000089 V2 EN
287
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection
288
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
9.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN
289
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
9.1.4 Signals
Table 191: SAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output
9.1.5 Settings
Table 193: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer
in % of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
290
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.
291
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 127
and equation 70. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to
the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset,
after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 70. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a
similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 70)
where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.
292
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]
2
3
0.5 4
0
90 95 100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN
9.1.7.4 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.1.7.5 Design
293
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
Block
BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
TimeDlyReset TRIP
100 ms
Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq
en05000726.vsd
IEC05000726 V1 EN
294
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
U=Umeasured
9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
9.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency
stage initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines
295
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN
9.2.4 Signals
Table 197: SAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
9.2.5 Settings
Table 199: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
296
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).
297
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
9.2.7.3 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.2.7.4 Design
BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735.vsd
IEC05000735 V1 EN
298
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
9.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early
indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative
change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
299
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN
9.3.4 Signals
Table 203: SAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output
9.3.5 Settings
Table 205: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
300
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
301
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
9.3.7.3 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.3.7.4 Design
302
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET BLOCK
OR
Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms
en05000835.vsd
IEC05000835 V1 EN
303
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR f<> 81A
9.4.2 Functionality
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR is based on measured system
frequency and time counters. FTAQFVR for generator protection provides the
START output for a particular settable frequency limit, when the system frequency
falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within
settable voltage band limit. The START signal triggers the individual event timer,
which is the continuous time spent within the given frequency band, and the
accumulation timer, which is the cumulative time spent within the given frequency
band. Once the timers reach their limit, an alarm or trip signal is activated to
protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency operation. This function is
blocked during generator start-up or shut down conditions by monitoring the circuit
breaker position and current threshold value. The function is also blocked when the
system positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band
limit which can be enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.
It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by
using multiple instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper
configuration based on the turbine manufacturer specification.
GUID-E27E0BC3-CB61-4E9E-9117-6AB8906F8362 V1 EN
304
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
9.4.4 Signals
Table 208: FTAQFVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed status input
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open status input
LOADINIT BOOLEAN 0 Loads the initial accumulation time to the function
HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is
activated
RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the accumulated time of the function
block
9.4.5 Settings
Table 210: FTAQFVR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
tContinuous 0.0 - 6000.0 s 0.1 20.0 Continuous time limit for frequency band
limits
tAccLimit 10.0 - 90000.0 s 0.1 600.0 Accumulation time limit for frequency
band limits
Table continues on next page
305
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
306
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
When the measured system frequency is above the FreqLowLimit setting and
below the FreqHighLimit setting, the FREQOK and START signals are activated. The
START signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input magnitude
and the status of the circuit breaker position.
FTAQFVR function will block START signal activation and Accumulation of time
under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band
limits.
When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal
input: Generator currents are considered to detect whether the generator is
supplying its unit auxiliary supply transformers or not. FTAQFVR function
will be blocked when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting
CurrStartLevel and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR remains blocked until
the generator returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the
CBCLOSE signal. Generator's start and stop detection logics for the START
output can be ignored by disabling the CBCheck setting.
When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside
the band limit.
The START output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and
the system positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the START output if the
EnaVoltCheck setting is disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the
settings UHighLimit and ULowLimit.
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage
falls within the voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.
To avoid oscillations of the START output signal, a hysteresis has been added with
current input comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block
FTAQFVR completely by activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to
reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR and freeze the accumulation time.
Time counters
FTAQFVR uses two time counters.
1. Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time
passing if the system frequency falls within the frequency band limits each
time. It resets when the frequency comes out of the frequency band limits and
also when the BLOCK binary input is activated and start from zero when a new
start is activated.
2. Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing
whenever the START output is activated. It holds the registered time value
even when the START signal is deactivated and continues from the registered
value when the START signal is reactivated.
The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input
HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the
307
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection
initTimeAcc parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and
it can be reset to zero by activating the RESETACC input. The RESETACC input
can be activated by a binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as
a service output.
The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This
output holds the last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.
Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and
tAcclLimit settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values,
TRIPCONT and ACCALARM outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is
activated if both the ACCALARM and START signals are activated. A common
TRIP signal is generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is activated.
Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <= ERROR
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR
FREQ FREQ
Comparator
If
FREQOK FREQOK
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
VOLTOK VOLTOK
Then
U3P
START
START
Accumulation time
Comparator
counter
U01 <= UHighLimit TRIPACC
START
AND
Signal Routing Continuous time
U01 >= ULowLimit
Based on counter TRIPCONT
Generator
START
Start or Stop AND
I3P Comparator
Detection Logic TRIP
I < CurrStartLevel
and Start & Trip
Voltage Band Limit
CBOPEN Output Logic
Check Logic
ACCALARM
CBCLOSE
LOADINIT STRORHLD
RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME
BLOCK LASTEVTD
IEC12000609-2-en.vsd
IEC12000609 V2 EN
To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the
set frequency low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that
FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit. If not, the ERROR signal is activated.
FTAQFVR can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the
turbine manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common
zone when two frequency ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and
keep only one instance of FTAQFVR active. The STRORHLD output is activated
when either the START output is active or when the HOLDACC input signal is on.
308
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection
The STRORHLD output is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance of
FTAQFVR.
Independent time delay for the (10.0 90000.0) s 0.2% or 200 ms whichever
accumulation time limit at fset is greater
+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz
309
Technical Manual
310
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -
10.1.2 Functionality
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a
negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as
open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth
faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three
functions are used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase
voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase
selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the
directional earth fault protection function.
311
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN
10.1.4 Signals
Table 214: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
Table continues on next page
312
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
313
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
10.1.5 Settings
Table 216: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used
NegSeq for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page
314
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
315
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
316
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
317
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
318
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
319
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
320
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 220.
321
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and
phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)
12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and
phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 221:
322
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 221 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 222 for built-in
current restraint feature:
323
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.
1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 220.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
3 (1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 220.
1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 221.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 221.
Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 220) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent
pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come
if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same
time.
324
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 220) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 221). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling
this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the
current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object).
For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured
voltage phasor (see table 221) and measured current phasor (see table 220) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user
to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will
simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the
directional criteria.
Table 223 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 223: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to
-90 depending on the power system earthing (that
is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Table continues on next page
325
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 136).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
326
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 136).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Operate region
mta line
en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.
327
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN
Figure 138: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN
Figure 139: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
328
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).
IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra ff *I r
pe e
O Co
es tr
I>R
IsetHigh
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.
Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 220) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip
329
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.
Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 221) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.
330
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
IED
ADM CVGAPC function
Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio
individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to
Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements
Phasors &
samples
IEC05000169_2_en.vsd
IEC05000169 V2 EN
Figure 141: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function
Figure 141 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 220) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 221) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 222) for
internally measured restraint current.
331
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
CURRENT
UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
STOC1
OC1 TROC1
STOC2
OC2 TROC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint 1
UDIRLOW
Directionality DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1 TROV1
STOV2
OV2 TROV2
STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1
STUV2
UV2 TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN
Figure 142: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
332
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Enable
second
harmonic Second
harmonic check
1 DEF time BLKTROC
selected DEF 1 TROC1
AND
OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse
Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831.vsd
IEC05000831 V1 EN
Figure 143: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)
333
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
en05000750.vsd
IEC05000750 V1 EN
Figure 144: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected
en05000751.vsd
IEC05000751 V1 EN
Figure 145: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)
334
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected
en05000752.vsd
IEC05000752 V1 EN
Figure 146: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)
Overcurrent:
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms
335
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms
See table 896 and Parameter ranges for customer defined See table 896 and table 897
table 897 characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage memory
takes over
Start overvoltage, (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U Ur
step 1 and 2 0.5% of U for U > Ur
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to Min = 15 ms -
1.2 x Uset Max = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -
0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms
High and low voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur for UUr
limit, voltage 1.0% of U for U>Ur
dependent operation
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic (-180 to +180) degrees 2.0 degrees
angle
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overcurrent
Table continues on next page
336
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection
337
Technical Manual
338
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control
11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -
11.1.2 Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it
can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.
IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN
11.1.4 Signals
339
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control
11.1.5 Settings
Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically
used by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of
measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower
response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and
340
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control
actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the
connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are
calculated with very high precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of
the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1 ) in
comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component).
Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are fully
synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two
multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second
one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN
measurement function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function
or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many
different protection applications can be arranged. For example the following
protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and
synchronous generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-
phase power system
Sensitive reverse power protection
Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.
341
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control
The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some
phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents)
and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or
simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used
either by over-/under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any
other external client via the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on
the setting parameter FilterLength. Table 228 gives overview of the used number
of samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of
samples is always a power of number two.
Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths
can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:
1000
3 = 180ms
16.7
EQUATION000028 V1 EN (Equation 72)
Thus based on the data from Table 228 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be
obtained by using FilterLength = 0.5 s
342
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control
Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the
disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise
present in the input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be
extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 229 it can be concluded that
FilterLength=1,0 s shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into
account it may be advisable to select FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency
band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the
signal frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter
FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the
measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once
75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate
but wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value
different from zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass
band can be defined as:
Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.
343
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control
gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength
IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V2 EN
The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED.
The following traces are presented in this Figure.
344
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.
With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency
are calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four
times per 1024 ms).
345
Technical Manual
346
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87
12.1.2 Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
347
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
12.1.4 Signals
Table 230: CCSSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
12.1.5 Settings
Table 232: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
348
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +
IL2
IL3 -
IL3
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms
20 ms 100 ms
150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK
en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN
Figure 149: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
349
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
12.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -
350
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
12.2.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise
might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection
methods, negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional
delta voltage and delta current detection.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.
IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN
351
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
12.2.4 Signals
Table 236: FUFSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected
voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
352
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
12.2.5 Settings
Table 238: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function Off/
On On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase
353
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 152:
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and
3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-
sequence current is below the set value 3I0<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.
354
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence
a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq
Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b
3U2>
IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN
The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on
local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block
for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during
355
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the
fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 153. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without
a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI<
356
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:
The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in at least one phase together with
high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected
line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be
followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse
failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled for at least
one phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is
connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If
the DUDI detection of one phase sets the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the
level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the
voltage of that phase is lower then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage,
or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on
a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way
DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the
setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1,
STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a
sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off
delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms
time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.
357
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1
DI< DeltaIL1
UL1
IL2 DeltaIL2
DUDI detection Phase 2
UL2 DeltaUL2
IL3 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
UL3 DeltaUL3
UL1
a
a<b
b
IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND
OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR
UL2
a
a<b
b
IL2
a
a>b
b AND
OR AND
AND OR
UL3
a
a<b
b
IL3
a
a>b
b AND
OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
OR
IEC12000166-2-en.vsd
IEC12000166 V2 EN
Figure 153: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part
358
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
intBlock
STDI
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND
STDU
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND
IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN
Figure 154: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 155. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
359
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
IL3
a
a<b
b
IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b
UDLD<
intBlock
IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN
Figure 155: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 156. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
360
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored
in the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary
power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value
in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present
before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before
fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and
the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the
VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ
in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open
independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation
of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts
of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.
361
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t
AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND
VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
IEC10000033 V2 EN
Figure 156: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic
362
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
12.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60
12.3.2 Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:
363
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN
12.3.4 Signals
Table 242: VDRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
364
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
12.3.5 Settings
Table 244: VDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase
365
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be
initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent
functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be
initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the
voltage reduction occurred.
When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions
are restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when
normal voltage conditions are restored.
366
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision
5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b
SealIn=0
vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0
MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL
vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL
vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL
IEC12000144-1-en.vsd
IEC12000144 V1 EN
367
Technical Manual
368
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Section 13 Control
13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
13.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.
369
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN
13.1.4 Signals
Table 249: SESRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
Table continues on next page
370
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
371
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.1.5 Settings
Table 251: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function Off/
On On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing
in % of UBaseLine
Table continues on next page
372
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
373
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
374
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit
breaker and the closing circuit.
For double bus single circuit breaker and 1 circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the
correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.
375
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings
SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation
is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the
breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected
line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase
angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is
deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
376
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated,
if the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to
smaller than 5 degrees.
OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND
TSTSC
InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA
UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60 AND
PhDiff < 5
IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN
Figure 160: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the
set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both
377
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line
is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable
frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency
FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally
preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time.
There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.
OperationSynch=On
TSTSYNCH
STARTSYN
InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH
UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t
UHighLineSynch OR
FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin
tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND
FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker
IEC06000636-4-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V4 EN
378
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function
block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool.
The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The
modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
379
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND
ManEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND
UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz
IEC14000031-1-en.vsd
IEC14000031 V1 EN
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND
AutoEnerg BOTH
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
UHighLineEnerg
TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND
IEC14000030-1-en.vsd
IEC14000030 V1 EN
380
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND
ManEnerg
1 bus CB
CBConfig AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
B2QCLD
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN
The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line
voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the
status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a
fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the
synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse
failure is needed.
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage
transformers for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and
381
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and
Bus voltages and MCB supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting
is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for
the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the
MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can
alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal
is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 165.
382
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND
B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND
bus1Voltage busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND
ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR
BLOCK
en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN
Figure 165: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1
1/2 circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt.
Bus CB or Tie CB.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to
the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.
383
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and
the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 166 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 167.
384
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
OR
B2SEL
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND
line1Voltage lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000780-2.vsd
IEC05000780 V2 EN
Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement
385
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND
line1Voltage busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND
line2Voltage lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000781-2.vsd
IEC05000781 V2 EN
Figure 167: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.
386
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
387
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.2.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/ SMBRREC 79
or 3 phase
O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN
13.2.2 Functionality
The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-
reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
388
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC06000189-2-en.vsd
IEC06000189 V2 EN
13.2.4 Signals
Table 256: SMBRREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip
signal
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from
SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on
delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream
devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping
occurred
Table continues on next page
389
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
390
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.2.5 Settings
Table 258: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control; Off / On
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed
reclosing 3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing
pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Min time that CB must be closed before
new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master
391
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding
of the functionality.
392
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting
parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the
function is activated while with the setting Operation = Off the function is
deactivated. With the setting Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On , the activation/
deactivation is made by input signal pulses to the inputs ON/OFF, for example,
from a control system.
When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
If the input conditions CBPOS and CBREADY also are fulfilled, the automatic
recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on
the SMBRREC function block is activated (high).
When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode
setting will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The
selected mode is reported as an integer on the output MODE.
The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a selective
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input.
Activation of the START input only will start the 3 phase open timer. It should be
necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different
power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages. The
input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used to start a 3 phase
dead time without synchro check condition..
CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and
start was applied
No BLKON or INHIBIT signal shall be present.
After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is
set. It can be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.
393
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 169. The following should be considered:
Setting Operation can be set to Off or On. ExternalCtrl offers the possibility of
switching by external signals to inputs ON and OFF.
SMBRREC is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a Zone 1 or
Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the
function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In
both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the
function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes
its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a time before the
starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-
reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.
Operation:On
AND
External Ctrl: On
OR
ON AND SETON
S
OR
OFF AND R
autoInitiate
initiate
OR
Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND
CBReady
start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS
t R
NC AND
CB Closed
CBAuxContType OR
Blocking conditions AND
NO AND READY
AND
OR
Inhibit conditions
count 0
IEC05000782-3-en.vsd
IEC05000782 V3 EN
It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto-
reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is
394
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the
normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel
for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant
time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open
time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter
Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long
trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.
Extended t1: On
PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start
long duration
AND
(inhibit SMBRREC)
IEC05000783.vsd
IEC05000783 V3 EN
Figure 170: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
395
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after
which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is
treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB
closing command is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state
in the reclosing sequence.
396
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
t1 1Ph
"SMBRREC Open time" timers
t
1P2PTO
From logic for t1 2Ph OR
reclosing t
programs
1P2PTO t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
t1 3Ph
3PT2TO t
3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND
SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBReady AND OR
SMRREC State
tSync Control
AND t COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
Pulse (above) tReclaim
AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC
TR3P reclosing Reclaim Timer On
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS
INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out tInhibit
t
OR
Inhibit
Long duration OR
INHIBIT Reclaim Timer On
IEC05000784.vsd
IEC05000784 V3 EN
397
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
tTrip
pulse tPulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms CloseCB
2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P
counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT
IEC05000785.vsd
IEC05000785 V2 EN
Figure 172: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
398
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing
shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the
reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains
open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the
reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked.
The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can
also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk
should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB
does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the
output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S
shot 0
R
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse OR tUnsucCl
AND
AND t
CBclosed
IEC05000786_High.vsd
IEC05000786 V2 EN
399
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
tAutoContWait
t
AND
CloseCB
AND
S Q
AND
CBClosed
OR
initiate
IEC05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V2 EN
400
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
StartByCBOpen = On
1
START AND
STARTHS AND
autoiniate
1
100 ms
AND
100 ms
AND
IEC05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V2 EN
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient
and permanent faults are shown below in figures 176 to 179.
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY CO)
START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY
INPROG
1PT1
ACTIVE
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
en04000196-3-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V3 EN
401
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY (CO)
START (Trip)
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1 t1 3Ph
3PT2 t2 3Ph
ACTIVE tReclaim
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197-
2.vsd
IEC04000197 V2 EN
402
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
CLOSE CB t1s
P3P
UNSUC CL tReclaim
en04000198-2.vsd
IEC04000198 V2 EN
403
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)
START
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
1PT1
3PT1
3PT2
t2
CLOSE CB t1s
P3P
UNSUC CL tReclaim
en04000199-
2.vsd
IEC04000199 V2 EN
Figure 179: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,
two-shot reclosing
404
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.3 Interlocking
13.3.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.
Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function
405
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:
Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
IEC04000526 V1 EN
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid
406
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Station bus
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
..
WA1
WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2
QB9 QB9
en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
407
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
13.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3
13.3.3.2 Functionality
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
408
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN
13.3.3.4 Signals
Table 261: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.
409
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
IEC04000525 V1 EN
13.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3
13.3.4.2 Functionality
The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 184.
QC
en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN
IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN
410
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
IEC04000546 V1 EN
13.3.4.5 Signals
Table 263: BB_ES Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part
are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this
busbar part
13.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3
13.3.5.2 Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 186. The
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.
411
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
QA1
QC3 QC4
en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN
IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN
412
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000542.vsd
IEC04000542 V1 EN
413
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd
IEC04000543 V1 EN
13.3.5.5 Signals
Table 265: A1A2_BS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
Table continues on next page
414
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
415
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector
13.3.6.2 Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 188.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QC2
A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd
IEC04000492 V1 EN
IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN
416
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
en04000544.vsd
IEC04000544 V1 EN
IEC04000545 V1 EN
13.3.6.5 Signals
Table 267: A1A2_DC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page
417
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3
418
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.3.7.2 Functionality
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 190. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN
419
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN
420
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC04000533 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000534.vsd
IEC04000534 V1 EN
421
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000535.vsd
IEC04000535 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
en04000536.vsd
IEC04000536 V1 EN
422
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd
IEC04000537 V1 EN
13.3.7.5 Signals
Table 269: ABC_BC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
Table continues on next page
423
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
424
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
425
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3
13.3.8.2 Functionality
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1
QA1 QA1
QC2 QC2
QB6 QB6
QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B
QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
IEC04000513 V1 EN
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.
426
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN
427
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN
BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN
428
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC04000560 V1 EN
429
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd
IEC04000554 V1 EN
430
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000555.vsd
IEC04000555 V1 EN
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
IEC04000556 V1 EN
431
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd
IEC04000557 V1 EN
432
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000558.vsd
IEC04000558 V1 EN
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
IEC04000559 V1 EN
433
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.8.5 Signals
Table 271: BH_LINE_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continues on next page
434
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
435
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
436
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
437
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3
13.3.9.2 Functionality
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement according to figure 196.
438
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4
QA1 QA2
DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5
QB61 QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.
439
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000547.vsd
IEC04000547 V1 EN
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd
IEC04000548 V1 EN
440
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
en04000552.vsd
IEC04000552 V1 EN
VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd
IEC04000553 V1 EN
441
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
& en04000549.vsd
IEC04000549 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd
IEC04000550 V1 EN
442
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd
IEC04000551 V1 EN
IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN
443
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN
13.3.9.5 Signals
Table 277: DB_BUS_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
Table continues on next page
444
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
445
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
446
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
447
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3
13.3.10.2 Functionality
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 200. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN
448
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN
449
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN
450
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQA1 QB1REL
& 1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd
IEC04000528 V1 EN
451
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQA1 QB2REL
& 1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd
IEC04000529 V1 EN
452
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2
IEC04000530 V1 EN
453
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN
454
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
IEC04000532 V1 EN
13.3.10.5 Signals
Table 283: ABC_LINE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page
455
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
456
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
457
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.3.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3
13.3.11.2 Functionality
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
QC3
QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking
QB3 QB4
en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN
458
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN
459
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1
en04000538.vsd
IEC04000538 V1 EN
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000539.vsd
IEC04000539 V1 EN
460
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000540.vsd
IEC04000540 V1 EN
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd
IEC04000541 V1 EN
13.3.11.5 Signals
Table 285: AB_TRAFO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page
461
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
462
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.3.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -
13.3.12.2 Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN
463
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0
13.3.12.5 Signals
Table 287: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality
13.4.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
464
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated
with an additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The
command sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command
was successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for
circuit breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing
switches). The physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two
function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.
465
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a
control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used
depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are:
466
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
467
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Table 290: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
Table continues on next page
468
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.4.4.1 Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN
13.4.4.3 Signals
Table 291: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
Table continues on next page
469
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.4.4 Settings
Table 293: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch
control functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay
control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the
IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the
Bay control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.
470
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to
select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be
ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output
will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.
Table 294: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 No priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate
471
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.
IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN
472
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12
IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN
13.4.5.2 Signals
Table 295: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
473
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.5.3 Settings
Table 299: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 208, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between
external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The
outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).
474
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12
IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN
Figure 208: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.
475
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.6.1 Functionality
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN
13.4.6.3 Signals
Table 300: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
Table continues on next page
476
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
477
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.6.4 Settings
Table 302: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of
478
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be
read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.
Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the
switch controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive
the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for
further evaluation.
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it
goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first
changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch
(SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
479
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
480
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function
IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
481
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
select
command termination
tResResponse t1>tResResponse, then
timer 1-of-n-control in 'cause'
t1 is set
en05000093.vsd
IEC05000093 V1 EN
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 213.
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.
482
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN
13.4.7.1 Functionality
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to
supervise the switching operation and position.
IEC05000338-3-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V3 EN
483
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.7.3 Signals
Table 303: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
484
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.4.7.4 Settings
Table 305: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 289.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local
HMI, a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal
from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The
health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment
health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 216.
485
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality
of the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual
value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR
will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions
determined by the process.
486
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 217 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 218 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.
487
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits
for the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating
function that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
488
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
13.4.8.1 Functionality
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN
489
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.8.3 Signals
Table 306: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI
490
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.4.8.4 Settings
Table 308: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 289.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according
to IEC61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
Figure 221.
491
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.
492
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 222 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 223 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.
493
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
494
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
13.4.9.1 Functionality
IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN
495
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.4.9.3 Signals
Table 309: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
496
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.4.9.4 Settings
Table 311: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 8
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible
to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
497
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 226. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
498
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN
13.4.10.1 Functionality
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).
IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN
499
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN
13.4.10.3 Signals
Table 312: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay
500
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.4.10.4 Settings
Table 316: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use
501
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
EXCH_IN INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
1
ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK 1
VALID_TX
&
BAY_VAL 1
RE_RQ_B
1
BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
1
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN
Figure 230 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay.
502
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN
13.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U
IEC10000165 V1 EN
IEC10000166 V1 EN
503
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.5.2 Functionality
The voltage control functions, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single
control TR1ATCC, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control
TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
as well as Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
used for control of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions
provide automatic regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers
or alternatively on a load point further out in the network.
The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and
TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a
transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either
for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.
In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding
where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap
changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function
for over current blocking.
504
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-
phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected
for current and voltage.
The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.
TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint,
a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical
around USet, see figure 231, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer
and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the
timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer
deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a
value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125%
of the tap changer step).
Security Range
*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DU DU Lower Cmd
DUin DUin
IEC06000489_2_en.vsd
IEC06000489 V2 EN
During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 231). In that case no actions will
be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater
than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as
the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists
longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate
ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the
transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the
magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of
505
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting
UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to
set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value.
This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Umin and Umax
Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the
transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the
network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation
(LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage
drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.
Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control
for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC:
master-follower method
reverse reactance method
circulating current method.
The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:
506
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance
from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative
reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel
transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position
will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer
with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage
decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be
avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.
If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE
interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete
exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made
cyclically every 300 ms.
The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:
507
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will
then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring
that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that
one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation.
At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.
IT1 IT2
UB
IL IL
UL Load UL Load
IEC06000484_2_en.vsd
IEC06000484 V2 EN
It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:
UT1 - UT 2
I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
ZT 1 + ZT 2
EQUATION1866 V1 EN (Equation 73)
508
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
UT1 CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1
UB
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2
UT2
IL
IT2 IT1
2*Udeadband
ICC_T2 ICC_T1
T2 Receives Cir_Curr T1 Produces Cir_Curr
IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
en06000525.vsd
IEC06000525 V1 EN
Figure 233: Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel
Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total
reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state
the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in
proportion to their rated power.
In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the
individual transformers must be communicated between the participating
TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs
run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be
exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to
synchronize measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common
reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers,
belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the
measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position
of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference.
This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for
synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.
At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the
secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and
distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group.
As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the
individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.
509
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through
load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation.
The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:
k
I L = Ii
i =1
where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of
parallel transformers in the group (k 8). Next step is to extract the circulating
current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current
which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current
in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:
I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN (Equation 75)
In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay.
A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus
sign means that the transformer receives circulating current.
As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each
transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first
converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:
U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN (Equation 76)
Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be
approximated with:
510
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN (Equation 77)
Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the
voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described
previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured
busbar voltage, and further control actions taken.
For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-
load voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The
calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A
steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or
URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the
transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner
deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in
the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 234,is a
fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the
described regulation works.
T1 T2 T3 T4
UBmean
T1 No-load voltage
DB1
DB2
USet
DB2
DB1
IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN
In the figure 234, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet,
and decreasing below that line.
In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and
T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.
511
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed
from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the
lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a
situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite
side of the USet line (in figure 234), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for
tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2,
although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case.
In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above
the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the
upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded
and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage
deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load
voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1,
would not be considered for tapping in this case.
512
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Logic diagrams
AUTO
UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &
a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &
a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b
a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b
UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &
FSD &
en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN
Figure 235: Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation
513
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
AUTO
PARALLEL START
&
OPERSIMTAP
UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &
&
a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &
U CIRCCOMP
&
MIN a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b >1
U CIRCCOMP
MAX a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b >1
UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &
FSD &
en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN
Figure 236: Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode
514
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
UCCT4 a
a=b
b &
T4PG &
T4
UCCT3 a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T3PG T3 SIMLOWER
1
UCCT2 a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T2
T2PG
UCCT1 a &
a=b
1 &
& T1
b
MAX
T1PG
a
a=b
b &
&
T1
a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T2PG T2 SIMRAISE
1
a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T3
T3PG
a &
a=b
1 &
T4
b &
T4PG
MIN
ADAPT
a
1
a=b
ActualUser S b
1 1
1
Udeadband S a
a=b
b
LoadVoltage
HOMING
OperSimTap
1
en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN
515
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
relativePosition a
a<b
<
raiseVoltageOut
b &
&
lowerVoltageOut
a
a>b
> =
b & URAISE
& 1
Follow Tap
&
& = ULOWER
1 1
YLTCOUT ATCCIN
tapPosition &
&
tapInHighVoltPos
tapInLowVoltPos
en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and
supervises that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive
possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and
monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give
information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.
1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray
coded binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.
516
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray
coded binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes
binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may
be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the
parameter CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The truth table (see table 318) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.
517
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC06000522 V1 EN
The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.
518
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC06000523 V1 EN
519
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into
N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer.
All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer
position value.
520
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA
IEC06000507_2_en.vsd
IEC06000507 V2 EN
The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one word containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower
or circulating current mode is used.
521
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:
522
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
Signal Description
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower
parallel control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control
mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down
523
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN
524
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
TR8ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET SINGLE
RSTERR PARALLEL
DISC TIMERON
Q1ON HOMING
Q2ON ADAPT
Q3ON TOTBLK
SNGLMODE AUTOBLK
T1INCLD MASTER
T2INCLD FOLLOWER
T3INCLD MFERR
T4INCLD OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD COMMERR
T8INCLD ICIRC
FORCMAST TRFDISC
RSTMAST VTALARM
ATCCIN T1PG
HORIZ1 T2PG
HORIZ2 T3PG
HORIZ3 T4PG
HORIZ4 T5PG
HORIZ5 T6PG
HORIZ6 T7PG
HORIZ7 T8PG
HORIZ8
IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN
TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
MA
IEC07000038_2_en.vsd
IEC07000038 V2 EN
525
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN
VCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID
IEC07000045-2-en.vsd
IEC07000045 V2 EN
526
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.5.7 Signals
Table 327: TR1ATCC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
527
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
528
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
529
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
530
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
531
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
532
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
533
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.5.8 Settings
Table 337: TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Table continues on next page
534
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
535
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
536
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
537
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
538
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
539
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
540
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
541
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
542
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
543
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target
value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the
system.
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.
544
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation
545
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.6.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC
(or the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.
IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN
13.6.4 Signals
Table 350: SLGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
546
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
547
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.6.5 Settings
Table 352: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled
548
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:
549
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN
Figure 246: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
13.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -
550
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.7.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used
for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.
IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN
13.7.4 Signals
Table 354: VSGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
551
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.7.5 Settings
Table 356: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
552
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication
13.8.2 Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.
IEC13000081 V1 EN
13.8.4 Signals
Table 357: DPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
553
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
13.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -
13.9.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a
collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from
REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need
extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
554
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN
13.9.4 Signals
Table 359: SPC8GAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection
13.9.5 Settings
Table 361: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
Table continues on next page
555
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3
556
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.10.2 Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN
13.10.4 Signals
Table 362: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
557
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
13.10.5 Settings
Table 364: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
558
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
559
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
560
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
561
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
562
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
563
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
564
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
565
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
566
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
567
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
568
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
569
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
570
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
571
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
572
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If
PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
13.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -
13.11.2 Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
573
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control
IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN
13.11.4 Signals
Table 386: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function
574
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control
13.11.5 Settings
Table 388: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
575
Technical Manual
576
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection
14.1.2 Functionality
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for example, permissive
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, unblocking, intertrip are
available.
IEC06000286-2-en.vsd
IEC06000286 V2 EN
577
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
14.1.4 Signals
Table 389: ZCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and
blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open
14.1.5 Settings
Table 391: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
578
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends
on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 253.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the
settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 253.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip
by activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.
579
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 254.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN
The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in
figure 254.
580
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 255. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN
Figure 255: Guard signal logic with unblocking schemeGuard singal logic with
unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.
581
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 256.
Unblock =Off
CR
Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR
BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL
Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR
tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
CSOR OR AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS
AND
IEC05000515-2-en.vsd
IEC05000515 V2 EN
582
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase
14.2.2 Functionality
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic
functions that supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not
suitable for standalone use as it requires inputs from the distance protection
functions and the scheme communications function included within the terminal.
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides
an output for sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending
end and other output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single-, two-,
and three-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage
detectors are used to detect the faulted phase(s).
583
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
IEC06000287-2-en.vsd
IEC06000287 V2 EN
14.2.4 Signals
Table 395: ZCRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
584
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.2.5 Settings
Table 397: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition
The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On.
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone
has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev, it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip
signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone. The
logic diagram for current reversal is shown in Figure 258.
585
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
BLOCK
IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t
CurrRev = On
IEC05000122-4-en.vsd
IEC05000122 V4 EN
The prevention of sending the send signal CS and activation of the TRIP in the
scheme communication block ZCPSCH is carried out by connecting the IRVL
signal to input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is
set to zero.
The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different
fault detection elements (distance protection in forward or reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 259, when:
The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
No active signal present on the input BLOCK.
The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei
setting. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme
communication logic ZCPSCH.
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLK1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is
usually configured to the VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2
functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not
undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
local breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.
586
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t
AND
OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t
WEI = Echo
IEC05000123-3-en.vsd
IEC05000123 V3 EN
Figure 259: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo
BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t
AND
1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND
U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR
15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR
15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t
IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd
IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN
Figure 260: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo&Trip
587
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
14.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -
14.3.2 Functionality
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication
channel is available, local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used. This logic
enables fast fault clearing and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it
can not fully replace a communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-
of-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
IEC13000307-1-en.vsd
IEC13000307 V1 EN
588
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.3.4 Signals
Table 400: ZCLCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for
fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent
instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone
extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of
load
14.3.5 Settings
Table 402: ZCLCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LoadCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
On
ZoneExtension Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Zone
On extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB
trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR
value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current
release
589
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason,
configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used
autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing
device, see figure 262.
IEC05000157 V1 EN
After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an
unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the
reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by
instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of-
load acceleration).
590
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
IEC05000158 V1 EN
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.
14.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection
14.4.2 Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.
591
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN
14.4.4 Signals
Table 404: ECPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
592
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.4.5 Settings
Table 406: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal
593
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
594
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
IEC05000448 V1 EN
In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.
595
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms
t TRIP
0 - 60 s
AND
BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 50 ms
CSUR OR t
en05000280_3_en.vsd
IEC05000280 V3 EN
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 266. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
596
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection
597
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
14.5.2 Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth
fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele protection
channels.
The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme
communication logic.
IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN
598
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
14.5.4 Signals
Table 409: ECRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
14.5.5 Settings
Table 411: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault
conditions measurement
599
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault
protection module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.
The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the
input signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is
shown in Figure 268. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without
tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the
permissive overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal.
The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual
current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.
BLOCK
IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t
CurrRev = On
IEC09000031-4-en.vsd
IEC09000031 V4 EN
600
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication
The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 269 and Figure 270.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-
end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 269
and Figure 270. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive
signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the
end of line.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth fault function that is in operation.
CR
BLOCK AND
VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t
WEIBLK2
AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t
WEI = Echo
IEC09000032-5-en.vsd
IEC09000032 V5 EN
Figure 269: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo
With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the
diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the
echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate
value for 3U0>.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth fault function which is in operation.
601
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication
BLOCK
VTSZ
OR
tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL
AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t
CBOPEN
AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t
WEI = Echo&Trip
IEC09000020-5-en.vsd
IEC09000020 V5 EN
Figure 270: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip
The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.
602
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
Section 15 Logic
15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
15.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving
faults and breaker lock-out.
IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN
603
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.1.4 Signals
Table 414: SMPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase
selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function
604
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.1.5 Settings
Table 416: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase
selection failed
For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single
input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED
requiring this signal.
BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t
Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph
en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN
605
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single
trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase
segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such
protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication
logic), and one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual
overcurrent protection).
The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or
three-phase trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.
The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A
special input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping,
forcing all tripping to be three-phase.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal
from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-
phase trip, if desired.
606
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
TRINL1
TRINL2
OR
TRINL3
1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3ph
IEC05000517-2-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V2 EN
TRIN
TRINL1
PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL2
PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL3
PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND
OR
OR OR
-loop
-loop
OR
AND AND AND
IEC10000056-2-en.vsd
IEC10000056 V2 EN
607
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
150 ms
L1TRIP OR
t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
150 ms
L2TRIP OR
t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
150 ms
L3TRIP OR
t OR
TTRIP
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR
OR AND
P3PTR
OR
-loop
IEC05000519-2-en.vsd
IEC05000519-WMF V2 EN
608
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
150 ms
L1TRIP
t OR RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
150 ms
L2TRIP
t OR STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t AND
AND
150 ms
L3TRIP
t OR TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
OR
AND
P3PTR OR
OR
-loop
IEC05000520-2-en.vsd
IEC05000520-WMF V2 EN
609
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
BLOCK
RTRIP TRL1
AND
OR
STRIP TRL2
AND
OR
TTRIP TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR
TR3P
AND AND
OR
-loop
AND 10 ms
TR1P
AND t
AND 5 ms
TR2P
AND t
OR
AND
-loop
IEC05000521-2-en.vsd
IEC05000521-WMF V2 EN
15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -
610
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.2.2 Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be
connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs
for settable pulse or steady output.
IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN
15.2.4 Signals
Table 419: TMAGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
Table continues on next page
611
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
612
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.2.5 Settings
Table 421: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
613
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 16
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 32
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN
Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
15.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -
15.3.2 Functionality
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
614
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN
15.3.4 Signals
Table 422: ALMCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
615
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.3.5 Settings
Table 424: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
1 t
Input 16
IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN
15.4 Identification
15.4.1 Functionality
Group alarm logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
616
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
1 t
INPUT16
IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN
15.4.4 Signals
Table 425: WRNCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page
617
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.4.5 Settings
Table 427: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
15.5 Identification
15.5.1 Functionality
Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
618
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN
When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
IND output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.
INPUT1
200 ms
IND
1 t
INPUT16
IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN
15.5.4 Signals
Table 428: INDCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page
619
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.5.5 Settings
Table 430: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
15.6.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
620
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output.
XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Set input has priority.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.
ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.
PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.
XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
621
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.
IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN
622
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.6.2.2 Signals
Table 431: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN
15.6.3.2 Signals
Table 433: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate
623
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN
15.6.4.2 Signals
Table 435: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4
IEC04000378-3-en.vsd
IEC04000378 V2 EN
624
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.6.5.2 Signals
Table 437: TIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
15.6.5.3 Settings
Table 439: TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
T 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of function
IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN
15.6.6.2 Signals
Table 440: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer
625
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.6.6.3 Settings
Table 442: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function
IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN
15.6.7.2 Signals
Table 443: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
626
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN
15.6.8.2 Signals
Table 445: LLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN
627
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.6.9.2 Signals
Table 448: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
15.6.9.3 Settings
Table 450: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On
628
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN
15.6.10.2 Signals
Table 452: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
15.6.10.3 Settings
Table 454: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On
IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN
629
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.6.11.2 Signals
Table 455: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
15.6.11.3 Settings
Table 457: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN
15.6.12.2 Signals
Table 458: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
630
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.6.12.3 Settings
Table 460: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
15.7.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.
IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN
15.7.2.2 Signals
631
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN
15.7.3.2 Signals
632
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN
15.7.4.2 Signals
IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN
15.7.5.2 Signals
633
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN
15.7.6.2 Signals
634
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.7.6.3 Settings
Table 472: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-
flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN
15.7.7.2 Signals
635
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.7.7.3 Settings
Table 476: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).
When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF
IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN
15.7.8.1 Signals
636
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.7.8.2 Settings
Table 479: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and will also propagate quality and time.
When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then return to 0.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.
The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to
the output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
15.7.9.1 Signals
15.7.9.2 Settings
Table 482: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length
637
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
Inputs are copied to outputs. If InputValid input is 0 or if its quality invalid bit is
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The timestamp of output
will be set to the latest timestamp of input and InputValid input.
iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN
15.7.10.2 Signals
638
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is
copied to time part of SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT
output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.
15.7.11.1 Signals
639
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN
State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding state output.
15.7.12.1 Signals
640
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
641
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
642
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -
15.9.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.
IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN
15.9.4 Signals
Table 492: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
643
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
15.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
644
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN
15.10.3 Signals
Table 493: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
645
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0
646
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.
15.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation
15.11.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
BTIGAPC is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
The block input will freeze the output at the last value.
BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).
IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN
647
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.11.4 Signals
Table 496: BTIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
15.11.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
648
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The
sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a
sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When
all INx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed
for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC
61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.
649
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -
15.12.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
IEC06000501-2-en.vsd
IEC06000501 V2 EN
15.12.4 Signals
Table 499: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
650
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value
=1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The
sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will
then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are
according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for
receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
651
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where
x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.
15.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation
652
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.13.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by
the function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for
the operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block.
The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new
integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.
IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN
15.13.4 Signals
Table 501: ITBGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection
653
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.13.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 503. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae:
OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16
will be equal to the integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1
function block.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
654
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx
(1x16) are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted
to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block
while the PSTO is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local,
then no changes are applied to the outputs.
15.14.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -
655
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
15.14.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 306.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain
q-1
OVERFLOW
a
&
a=b
999 999 s b
WARNING
a
&
a=b
tWarning b
ALARM
a
&
a=b
tAlarm b
IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN
656
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
15.14.4 Signals
Table 504: TEIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time
15.14.5 Settings
Table 506: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision
time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value
Figure 308 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.
657
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
IEC12000195-3-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V3 EN
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is,
there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
658
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more
pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.
659
Technical Manual
660
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Section 16 Monitoring
16.1 Measurements
16.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
16.1.2 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is
661
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:
662
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN
CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN
663
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN
664
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.1.4 Signals
Table 508: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
665
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
666
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
667
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only
available in the first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for
voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
voltage supervised object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of
the supervised object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.
668
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
669
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
670
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
671
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
672
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
673
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
674
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
675
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
676
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
677
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
678
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
679
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
680
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
681
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
682
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
683
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN
684
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 315.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
IEC05000500 V1 EN
685
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y
99000529.vsd
IEC99000529 V1 EN
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the Y set limits.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 318 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
686
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
99000530.vsd
IEC99000530 V1 EN
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-
phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
687
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
Mode
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* *
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
*
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN
to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 78)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN
voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 79) available
3 PosSeq Used when
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U = 3 U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 80) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 81) be measured
is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN (Equation 89)
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U = 3 U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 90) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN
is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN (Equation 91)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U = 3 U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 92)
I = I L3 earth voltage
EQUATION1401 V1 EN
is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN (Equation 93)
* means complex conjugated value
688
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating
modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that
the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is
calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following
formulas:
P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 94)
Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 95)
S = S = P +Q
2 2
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 97)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and
voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is
lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
689
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
IEC05000652 V2 EN
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 98)
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
690
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.
Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 320.
691
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply
obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.
692
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
693
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
694
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.2.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.
695
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.2.3 Signals
Table 544: TRM_12I Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12
696
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
697
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.2.4 Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.
698
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
699
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
701
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
702
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
703
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
704
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
705
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)
706
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.
16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63
16.3.2 Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms
based on received information.
707
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN
16.3.4 Signals
708
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.3.5 Settings
Table 563: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which
the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.
709
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71
710
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.2 Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.
IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN
16.4.4 Signals
711
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.4.5 Settings
Table 567: SSIML Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for
more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or
lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting
the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used
with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM
can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms
and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.
712
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.5.1 Identification
713
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.5.2 Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the
accumulated energy during arcing periods.
IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN
16.5.4 Signals
Table 569: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time
714
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.5.5 Settings
Table 571: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
Table continues on next page
715
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
716
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
717
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER
CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT
718
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 326.
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT
TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN
Figure 326: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Main Contact
0
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4
IEC12000616 V1 EN
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting.
719
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr
(t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the
input RSTCBWR.
The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 328.
Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check
OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS
IEC12000613-3-en.vsd
IEC12000613 V3 EN
Figure 328: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
720
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN
Figure 329: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker
721
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to
the InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from
LHMI or by activating the input RSTCBWR.
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 330.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND
LRSTIPOW
IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends
when the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
722
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1
0 0
Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts
ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN
Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay
between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the
setting OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value
can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input
RSTIPOW.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.
The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after
each closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 332.
723
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR
OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN
Figure 332: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change
of the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on
the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLOCK
input is activated.
The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set
level. The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure
333.
POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN
Figure 333: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
724
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring
the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.
The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 334.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT
Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN
Figure 334: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.
725
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 335.
PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM
BLKALM
tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN
Figure 335: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated
after a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can
be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes
high, activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the
tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals
from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
726
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN
16.6.2 Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN
16.6.4 Signals
Table 575: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page
727
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.6.5 Settings
Table 576: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page
728
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
729
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical
signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the
730
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal
logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of
EVENT function. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary
input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are
treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can
be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It
is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.
731
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Disturbance report A2RADR - -
Disturbance report A3RADR - -
Disturbance report A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Disturbance report B2RBDR - -
Disturbance report B3RBDR - -
Disturbance report B4RBDR - -
Disturbance report B5RBDR - -
Disturbance report B6RBDR - -
16.7.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with
a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
Event list
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The
732
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local
HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN
A1RADR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
IEC05000430 V3 EN
A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN
733
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 340: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR
16.7.4 Signals
Table 577: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
734
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
735
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
736
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
737
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
738
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.7.5 Settings
Table 588: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
739
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
740
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
741
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
742
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
743
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
744
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
745
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
746
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
747
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
748
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
749
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
750
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
751
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
752
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
753
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
754
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
755
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
756
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
757
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
758
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
759
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
760
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
761
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
762
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
763
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
764
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
765
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
766
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
767
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
768
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
769
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
770
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
771
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
772
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
773
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
774
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
775
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
776
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
777
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
778
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
779
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
780
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
781
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Figure 341 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.
782
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
A4RADR DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator
B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder
Event recorder
Indications
IEC09000336-2-en.vsd
IEC09000336 V2 EN
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile
flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
en05000125.vsd
IEC05000125 V1 EN
783
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications
(IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time
en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN
Figure 343: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.
784
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
785
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder
and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).
786
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
787
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to
788
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig
condition during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset.
However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.
789
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -
16.8.2 Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.
790
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN
16.8.4 Signals
Table 611: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16
791
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.8.5 Settings
Table 613: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.
792
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t t
IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN
16.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -
16.9.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-
high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or
above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN
793
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.9.4 Signals
Table 614: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -
794
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
16.10.2 Functionality
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the
fault in km, miles or % of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy
achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect
on double circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation
of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual
fault to further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up
to 35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.
IEC05000679-2-en.vsd
IEC05000679 V3 EN
16.10.4 Signals
Table 617: LMBRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)
795
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.10.5 Settings
Table 619: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line
796
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and
voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used
by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report
function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the
parameter setting tool within PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed
and additional fault resistance.
797
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
IEC05000045_2_en.vsd
IEC05000045 V2 EN
Figure 350: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due
to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of
order, and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation
of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its
also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault
can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a
part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and
managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-
end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not
done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the
amount of additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
Figure 351 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed
from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at
a distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of
the algorithm.
798
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB
IF
UA RF
xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN
U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN (Equation 99)
Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN (Equation 100)
Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and
DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A
and the total fault current.
( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN (Equation 101)
799
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA
U A = I A p Z L + -------
- RF
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN (Equation 102)
Table 622: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is
equal to:
Z0L Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN (Equation 103)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current
before the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted
into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
800
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
I FA
U A = I A p Z 1L + -------- RF + I 0P Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN (Equation 104)
Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN
Z0L Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - -------
- + ----------------
3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN (Equation 105)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these
two cases.
Where:
UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A ZL Z L + ZA DD
UA ZB
K2 = --------------- --------------------------- + 1
IA Z L Z L + Z A DD
IF A ZA + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = ---------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN (Equation 109)
and:
801
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 106 applies to both single
and parallel lines.
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN (Equation 111)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 111,
and then inserted to equation 110. According to equation 110, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 110 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should
be selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate
the relative distance to the fault.
U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN (Equation 112)
Where:
IA is according to table 622.
802
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs
that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.
16.11.1 Identification
16.11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -
16.11.2 Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four
independent limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the
input signal are counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each
limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.
803
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.11.3.1 Design
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
Limit LIMIT1 4
MaxValue Check
CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue
IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN
The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of
the function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:
Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 353.
804
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1 Max value Max value +1 Max value +2 Max value +3 ...
IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN
The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or
initial value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting
the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error
condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is
not counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can
be initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their
initial states until the release of the block input.
16.11.3.2 Reporting
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely,
for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a
measurement on the local HMI graphical display.
IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN
805
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring
16.11.5 Signals
Table 624: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
16.11.6 Settings
Table 626: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or
Rollover Pulsed pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function
806
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring
807
Technical Manual
808
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
Section 17 Metering
17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -
S00947 V1 EN
17.1.2 Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN
809
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
17.1.4 Signals
Table 629: PCFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value
17.1.5 Settings
Table 631: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value
810
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.
811
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
Figure 356 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local
HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal
connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The
signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module,
where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
812
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
17.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling
17.2.2 Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well
as reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy
calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power
values by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active
813
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output
channels. The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated
for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD
input.
IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN
17.2.4 Signals
Table 634: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading
814
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
17.2.5 Settings
Table 636: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
Table continues on next page
815
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
816
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN
The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled
by the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the
output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 359 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and
the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the
817
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC T
1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &
q-1
RSTACC
The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service
values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can
be connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for
forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to
initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or
with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 360 shows the logic for integration of energy
in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F
&
q-1
EALim T
q-1 0.0 F
a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN
818
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering
a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1
0
X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
Figure 361: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and
stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD,
MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward
and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset
menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the
periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 362 shows the logic
of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active
power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm
outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.
819
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F
q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN
Figure 362: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm
820
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.3.1 Functionality
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is
equipped with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for
IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is
also possible from the optical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows
intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange
information and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using
GOOSE and client-server communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance
recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.
821
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two
ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-
address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2
has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
18.3.3 Settings
Table 641: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled
822
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.3.5.1 Functionality
IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN
823
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.3.5.3 Signals
Table 643: SPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status
18.3.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
824
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single
Point indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.
825
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.3.6.1 Functionality
IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN
18.3.6.3 Signals
Table 647: MVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value
18.3.6.4 Settings
Table 649: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page
826
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the
value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.
Function description LHMI identification IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration
827
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.3.7.1 Functionality
IEC09000757-1-en.vsd
IEC09000757 V1 EN
18.3.7.3 Signals
Table 651: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid
18.3.7.4 Settings
Table 652: PRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address
828
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
829
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Redundancy
Supervision
Duo
Data Data
Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2
Data
Data
AB CD IED
Configuration OEM
DUODRV PRPSTATUS
IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN
830
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.4.1 Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for
the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.
18.4.3 Signals
831
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
832
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
833
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.4.4 Settings
Table 660: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
834
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
835
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
836
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
837
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
838
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module
port "CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input
module and is engineered in the very same way.
839
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
IED
Application
Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI
MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
TRM module OEM Module
CD
110 V 1A 1A
IEC61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE
ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit
Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor
Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd
IEC08000072 V2 EN
Figure 368: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and
conventional CT/VT
840
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or
the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is
individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section
"Time synchronization"
Blocking condition
Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode.
A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore
protection functions in this case will be blocked.
18.5.1 Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
841
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are
available. For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
18.5.2 Settings
Table 679: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for
example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus
master.
842
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short
messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking
signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as
events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of
network variables.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a
LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
843
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in
the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses.
Table 681 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks.
The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after
the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast
loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function
blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to
EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send
binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring
functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 681
844
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the
event function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is
always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function
block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection
function is event masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from
the event function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or
N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out
845
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before
sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That
is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28;
the SPA addresses are according to table 682.
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83).
SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.
LON
en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window.
From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
846
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them
there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/
Download.
847
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.
Table 682: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page
848
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
849
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
850
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
851
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
852
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
853
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
854
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
855
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
856
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
857
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
858
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
859
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.6.1 Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.
18.6.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC
requires the following equipment:
Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA
cannot be used with PCM600 2.6).
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required
is a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.
860
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.6.3 Settings
Table 684: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends
information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all
slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive
state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found
in table 686.
861
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
862
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
863
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are
found in table 687.
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module
function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses,
refer to section Related documents in Product Guide.
864
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals
function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first
output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example,
output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
865
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558
Figure 372 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 688.
866
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
^OUT2 #1.000 T
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT8 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
INPUT2 NOUT T
^OUT9 #1.000
INPUT3
^OUT10
INPUT4N
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16
SYNCH OK
IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN
Figure 372: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control
of a circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady
or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting /
General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented
in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on
each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The
event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest
event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 689.
867
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN
868
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.
18.7.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
18.7.2.1 Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.
869
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P,
Q, F are optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).
18.7.2.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -
IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN
18.7.2.4 Signals
Table 691: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
Table continues on next page
870
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.2.5 Settings
Table 692: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency
18.7.3.1 Functionality
871
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.3.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN
18.7.3.4 Signals
Table 693: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9
872
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.3.5 Settings
Table 694: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 9
18.7.4.1 Functionality
18.7.4.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103
873
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN
18.7.4.4 Signals
Table 695: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked
18.7.4.5 Settings
Table 696: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
18.7.5.1 Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.5.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103
874
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN
18.7.5.4 Signals
Table 697: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
18.7.5.5 Settings
Table 698: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)
18.7.6.1 Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that
is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the
IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
18.7.6.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103
875
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN
18.7.6.4 Signals
Table 699: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
Table continues on next page
876
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.6.5 Settings
Table 700: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)
18.7.7.1 Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is
defined for each input signal.
877
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.7.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -
IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN
18.7.7.4 Signals
Table 701: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active
18.7.7.5 Settings
Table 702: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
878
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.8.1 Functionality
18.7.8.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -
IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN
18.7.8.4 Signals
Table 703: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of
I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
879
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.8.5 Settings
Table 704: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
18.7.9.1 Functionality
GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN
Figure 381:
18.7.9.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Status for user defiend signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103
880
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN
18.7.9.4 Signals
Table 705: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8
18.7.9.5 Settings
Table 706: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
Table continues on next page
881
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.10.1 Functionality
18.7.10.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103
IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN
18.7.10.4 Signals
Table 707: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
882
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.10.5 Settings
Table 709: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
18.7.11.1 Functionality
18.7.11.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -
IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN
18.7.11.4 Signals
Table 710: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
883
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.11.5 Settings
Table 712: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)
18.7.12.1 Functionality
18.7.12.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN
18.7.12.4 Signals
Table 713: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
884
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.12.5 Settings
Table 715: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)
18.7.13.1 Functionality
885
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.13.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103
IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN
18.7.13.4 Signals
Table 716: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
18.7.13.5 Settings
Table 718: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)
886
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.7.14.1 Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position
value as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The
standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used
to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-
operate type of control)
18.7.14.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103
IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN
18.7.14.4 Signals
Table 719: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object
887
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.7.14.5 Settings
Table 720: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)
18.7.15.1 General
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)
Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard
part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in
the protection and control IED.
888
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 4
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
889
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
2* Output signal 02
3* Output signal 03
4* Output signal 04
5* Output signal 05
6* Output signal 06
7* Output signal 07
8* Output signal 08
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 20
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range.
Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.
890
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
2* Input signal 02
3* Input signal 03
4* Input signal 04
5* Input signal 05
6* Input signal 06
7* Input signal 07
8* Input signal 08
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 1
891
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes
Number of instances: 1
892
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Number of instances: 1
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
893
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require
that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as
maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate
value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the
best accuracy.
894
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be
specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
895
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the
private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available
for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by
the master) will not be reported to the master again.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other
information is always set (hard coded) to:
896
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for
each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault
number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip
and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF
is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
897
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
Supported
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
898
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.8.1 Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point
and analog measured values between IEDs.
899
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V2 EN
18.8.3 Signals
Table 732: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
900
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
901
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.8.4 Settings
Table 734: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
902
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
IEC07000047-2-en.vsd
IEC07000047 V2 EN
18.9.2 Signals
Table 735: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
903
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.9.3 Settings
Table 737: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
904
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
18.10.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.
IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN
18.10.4 Signals
Table 738: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
905
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.10.5 Settings
Table 740: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
18.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
18.11.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
906
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN
18.11.4 Signals
Table 741: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
18.11.5 Settings
Table 743: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
907
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
18.12.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN
18.12.4 Signals
Table 744: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
908
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.12.5 Settings
Table 746: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
18.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
909
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.13.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.
IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN
18.13.4 Signals
Table 747: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
18.13.5 Settings
Table 749: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
910
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF
18.14.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which
voltage control information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other
IEDs via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.
The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via
GOOSE communication:
BusV
LoadAIm
LoadARe
PosRel
SetV
VCTRStatus
X2
911
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.14.3 Settings
Table 750: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval
18.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV
18.15.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE
network at the user defined rate.
This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and
test mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception.
Data validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid
then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity
using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.
IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN
912
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.15.4 Signals
Table 751: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function
18.16.1 Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes
16 binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.
18.16.2 Design
18.16.2.1 General
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.
1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse
with a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the
corresponding binary output. This means that no connected function block
may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of the
particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
913
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN
18.16.4 Signals
Table 753: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
914
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
915
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
18.16.5 Settings
Table 757: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are
60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the
others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision
function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
916
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication
18.17.1.1 Signals
Table 759: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event
18.17.1.2 Settings
Table 760: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.
18.18.2 Settings
Table 761: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Table continues on next page
917
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication
918
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
19.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -
19.1.2 Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection,
or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series
IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any
purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or
other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCM.
919
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication
IEC07000043-2-en.vsd
IEC07000043 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN
19.1.4 Signals
Table 762: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
Table continues on next page
920
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
921
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication
19.1.5 Settings
Table 765: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On
922
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
923
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication
924
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
925
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication
926
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag
IEC01000134 V1 EN
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in
the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16
definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a
separate addressing is included in the data field.
927
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from
the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC
function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and
eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are
represented as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data
capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which
gives the capacity of 192 signals.
IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN
928
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication
19.2.2 Signals
Table 771: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to
remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to
remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N
to remote end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to
remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to
remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to
remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N
to remote end
929
Technical Manual
930
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -
20.1.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.
931
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN
20.1.3 Settings
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required
when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
932
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User
Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local
HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on
local HMI.
933
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the
IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to
60 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and
downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or
when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log
on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the
user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and
down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E
key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following
character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password.
After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the E key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes
it right or presses Cancel.
20.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -
934
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.
20.2.3 Settings
Table 773: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout
20.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features, it tries to
negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS. If the specified port is any other,
it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.
Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
935
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.3.3 Settings
Table 774: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
20.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -
20.4.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN
20.4.4 Signals
Table 775: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
936
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC
61850 station bus.
20.5.1 Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal
system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in
PCM600 event viewer tool.
IEC09000787 V1 EN
937
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.5.3 Signals
Table 776: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block
20.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A
maximum of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN
938
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC04000520 V1 EN
IO fail
OR Set e.g. BIM 1 Error
IO stopped
Reset
IO started
e.g. IOM2 Error OR
e.g. IO (n) Error Internal
OR FAIL
LON ERROR
TIMESYNCHERROR
OR TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset Set
SYNCH OK Reset
SETCHGD
Settings changed
1 second pulse
en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN
939
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 777.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 778.
940
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
406.
941
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
ADx
ADx_Low
x1
u1
x2
ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1
u1
x2
IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the
CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
20.6.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system.
This makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a
station automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging
unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
942
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN
20.6.3 Signals
Table 781: TIMEERR Output signals
Name Type Description
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
20.6.4 Settings
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time
943
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
944
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
945
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
946
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
947
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error,
that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own
faults and tries to compensate for them.
External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation
Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection
PPS
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.
948
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an
automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/
disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the
local HMI.
If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized
When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is,
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast
mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical
structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.
949
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
950
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of
the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized
for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. Normally, it takes an hour to reach full accuracy.
The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.
951
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine
source. The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time,
that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the
IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
952
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute
after the last flank.
Pulse data:
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse.
The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is
less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the
minute pulse will not be accepted.
953
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second
are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are
numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic
BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be
supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via
either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means
a number in the range of 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-
B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz
modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the
BNC connector.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time
plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.
954
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
PPS
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +/- 2 s after
another PPS signal. The allowed jitter is <2 s. If jitter is >2 s a TSYNCERR
signal will be generated.
For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.
20.7.1 Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly
adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.
955
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
IEC05000433_2_en.vsd
IEC05000433 V2 EN
SETGRPS
MAXSETGR
IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
IEC05000716 V2 EN
20.7.3 Signals
Table 790: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active
956
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.7.4 Settings
Table 792: ACTVGRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Pulse length of pulse when setting
changed
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower
order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and
group two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.
957
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
IOx-Bly1 ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6 ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD
en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used
will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.
20.8.1 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
958
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN
20.8.3 Signals
Table 794: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock
20.8.4 Settings
Table 796: CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation LockHMI and Com - - LockHMI and Com Operation mode of change lock
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED
state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
959
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated
20.9.1 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes
normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed
and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection
functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN
20.9.3 Signals
Table 797: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode
960
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.9.4 Settings
Table 799: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block
TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows
the cause of the Test mode: being in On state. If the input from the configuration
(OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is
activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality
and event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode
(output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 416. When leaving the test
mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is
set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured
961
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are
possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test
mode is set to off.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the
IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the re-
entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked
for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by
local HMI.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 416.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example
during a commissioning or maintenance test.
962
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN
20.10.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
963
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.10.2 Settings
Table 800: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)
20.11.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:
ProductVer
ProductDef
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers
This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).
20.11.2 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
964
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEDProdType
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
ProductDef
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
ProductVer
Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3
1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware
is either changed or enhanced in the product
IEDMainFunType
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
20.12.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.
965
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN
20.12.3 Signals
Table 801: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
966
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.13.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the
Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs
are sent from one IED configuration.
IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN
20.13.3 Signals
Table 803: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table continues on next page
967
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.14.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.
IEC05000440-2-en.vsd
IEC05000440 V2 EN
968
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.14.3 Signals
Table 804: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
20.15.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase
angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on.
969
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI
block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).
IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be
used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
970
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC14000027-1-en.vsd
IEC14000027 V1 EN
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N
IEC14000028-1-en.vsd
IEC14000028 V1 EN
20.15.4 Signals
Table 806: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used
for DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity
971
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.15.5 Settings
972
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
973
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the
four inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note
that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration.
Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always
be connected to AI3P.
974
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -
20.16.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values,
common for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values
consists of values for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have
six different sets.
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one
out of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.
20.16.3 Settings
20.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -
975
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.17.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power
system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.
20.17.3 Settings
Table 815: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1
20.18.1 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might
need it.
IEC05000441-2-en.vsd
IEC05000441 V2 EN
20.18.3 Signals
Table 816: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI
976
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.18.4 Settings
977
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
20.19.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so
that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN
DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN
IEC13000309-1-en.vsd
20.19.3 Signals
Table 820: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state
978
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.19.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
979
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions
980
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions
981
Technical Manual
982
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.1 Overview
IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN
983
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
IEC05000762-2-en.psd
IEC05000762 V2 EN
IEC04000460-2-en.psd
IEC04000460 V2 EN
984
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
985
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
986
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
987
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
988
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
989
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.1 Overview
Table 831: Basic modules
Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
990
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.2.1 Introduction
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM
is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.
21.2.2.2 Functionality
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP
slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a
flash file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup
of the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.
991
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
Compact
Flash Logic
PMC
connector
PC-MIP
connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet
North
bridge
Backplane
PCI-PCI-
connector
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN
21.2.3.1 Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.
21.2.3.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different
DC input voltage ranges see table 833. The power supply module contains a built-
992
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the
terminal and the external battery system.
Connection diagram
IEC08000476 V2 EN
21.2.5.1 Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
21.2.5.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of
the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input
transformers.
993
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
Basic versions:
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI".
IEC08000479 V2 EN
994
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Table 835: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A
995
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.6.1 Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 836. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
21.2.6.2 Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from
the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the
electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts
with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit
dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
996
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN
997
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.7.1 Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the
inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the
functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation
of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
21.2.7.2 Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage
level of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI".
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 434 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.
998
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN
Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 435 and 436.
999
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
[mA]
50
55 [ms]
en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN
Figure 435: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.
[mA]
50
5.5 [ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN
Figure 436: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
1000
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
IEC99000503 V3 EN
21.2.7.3 Signals
Table 837: BIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
Table continues on next page
1001
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.7.4 Settings
Table 838: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit
1002
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Table 841: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz
21.2.8.1 Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip
output or any signaling purpose.
21.2.8.2 Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 438.
This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal
on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to
breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of
the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel
reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".
1003
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
Output module
xx00000299.vsd
IEC00000299 V1 EN
IEC99000505 V3 EN
1004
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.8.3 Signals
Table 842: BOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24
21.2.8.4 Settings
Table 844: BOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
1005
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1006
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1007
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1008
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1009
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.9.1 Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over
output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
21.2.9.2 Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM
IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
1010
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
IEC09000974-1-en.vsd
IEC09000974 V1 EN
IEC09000975 V1 EN
21.2.9.3 Signals
Table 847: SOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
Table continues on next page
1011
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.9.4 Settings
Table 849: SOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
1012
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1013
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1014
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Table 852: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):
Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0s 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the
maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s 30A
1.0s 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms 48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
21.2.10.1 Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any
signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for
applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary
inputs cater for required binary input information.
21.2.10.2 Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
435. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 434.
1015
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output
relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output
contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common
and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output
channels, see figure 442.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix
for binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
1016
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN
Figure 442: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds
to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named
XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.
1017
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
21.2.10.3 Signals
Table 853: IOMIN Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
1018
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.10.4 Settings
Table 855: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit
1019
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1020
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Table 859: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Table continues on next page
1021
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Table 860: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms
contact, 1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/ 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
1022
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11.1 Introduction
21.2.11.2 Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are
calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a
non-volatile memory on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.
1023
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
IEC99000504 V2 EN
21.2.11.3 Signals
Table 861: MIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
CH2 REAL Analog input 2
CH3 REAL Analog input 3
Table continues on next page
1024
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11.4 Settings
Table 862: MIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh2 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 2
DeadBandCh2 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2
IMinCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 2
IMaxCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2
ValueMinCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh3 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 3
DeadBandCh3 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 3
IMinCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 3
IMaxCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 3
ValueMinCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh4 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 4
DeadBandCh4 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 4
IMinCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 4
IMaxCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4
Table continues on next page
1025
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1026
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.12.1 Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is
used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one
port is dedicated for LON communication.
21.2.12.2 Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations
of optical fiber connectors, see figure 445. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-
in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
1027
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear
side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and
contact 1 in the lowest position.
1028
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.13.1 Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port.
The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or
4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and
is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant
requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated
signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the
rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
21.2.13.2 Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module.
1029
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
Angle
bracket
Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6
Backplane
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV
1030
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.14.1 Introduction
21.2.14.2 Functionality
21.2.14.3 Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine
card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single
channel or double channel unit.
IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN
1: Transmitter
2: Receiver
1031
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.15.1 Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 448.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
21.2.15.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:
the ADM
the NUM
1032
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
ST
IO-connector
ST
IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC07000087 V2 EN
Figure 448: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two
PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC06000393 V2 EN
Figure 449: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
1033
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.16.1 Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
1034
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.16.2 Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.
C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN
1 4
1 8
9 15
3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN
1035
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
I/O
100kW 100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN
Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IO-
ground can be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2
direct to the chassi.
2. No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 451
X.21 connector
1036
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.16.3 Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is
64 kbit/s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The
transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a
device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and
when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be
inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE
Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
21.2.17.1 Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.
1037
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.17.2 Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots.
The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time
data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output
connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.
21.2.18.1 Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.
21.2.18.2 Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or
on an antenna mast. See figure 453
1038
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1 6
4 7
xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN
where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a
male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose
cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.
1039
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.2.19.1 Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of
the IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
21.2.19.2 Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input
type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
1040
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
ST
Y2
A1
T
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN
Figure 454: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input
21.2.19.3 Settings
Table 876: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ
1041
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.3 Dimensions
A
D
B C
IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN
1042
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
K
F
G
H J
xx08000166.vsd
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 456: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit
1043
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
A
D
B
C
IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN
1044
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
K
F
G
J
H
xx08000165.vsd
IEC08000165 V1 EN
Figure 458: Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit
IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN
1045
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
A C
B
E
D
IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN
1046
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN
Figure 461: A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
G
D
B
E
F
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN
1047
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN
1048
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
[1.48]
[6.97]
[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps
IEC06000232 V2 EN
[7.50]
en06000234.eps
[inches]
IEC06000234 V2 EN
Figure 465: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
1049
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.4.1.1 Overview
1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class
IP54 protection.
1050
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN
1051
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
21.4.2.1 Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening
screws for the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19
or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.
1052
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1a
1b
IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN
21.4.3.1 Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
1053
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.
IEC13000266-1-en.vsd
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V3 EN
1054
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to
use with this type of mounting. See figure 469.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.
3
1
80 mm 2
IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN
Figure 469: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
21.4.4.1 Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-
side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
1055
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
2
1
IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN
1056
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN
Figure 471: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch
and a RX2 terminal base
21.4.5.1 Overview
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
1057
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1 2
IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN
Figure 472: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19 IED).
21.5.1 Enclosure
Table 878: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
1058
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
Table 879: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
1059
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms No restart
0 s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <300 s
1060
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware
1061
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware
1062
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 22
Labels
Section 22 Labels
2
3
6
6 5
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN
1063
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Labels
IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN
IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN
1064
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 22
Labels
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
4 Warning label
1065
Technical Manual
1066
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 23
Connection diagrams
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as
part of the product delivery.
1067
Technical Manual
1068
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 24
IED and functionality tests
1069
Technical Manual
Section 24 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED and functionality tests
1070
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
25.1 Application
Stage 3
Time
Stage 2 Stage 2
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
1071
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance
time and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of
following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
1072
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A1 B1
Feeder
I> I>
Time axis
en05000132.vsd
IEC05000132 V1 EN
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when
the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the
following applications:
1073
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for
other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to
assure the release function.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the
current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is
reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the
hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 113.
A
t[ s ] = + B k
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN (Equation 113)
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
1074
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can
be seen:
i p
(top - B k ) - C = Ak
in >
EQUATION1190 V1 EN (Equation 114)
where:
top is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils
according to equation 115, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
EQUATION1191 V1 EN (Equation 115)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
n i( j ) p
Dt - C A k
j =1 in >
EQUATION1192 V1 EN (Equation 116)
where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when
i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the
IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 477.
1075
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse
time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note
that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time
multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN (Equation 118)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current
1076
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
i
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
k in >
EQUATION1195 V1 EN (Equation 119)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse
time curve according to the general equation 120.
A
t[ s ] = + Bk
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1196 V1 EN (Equation 120)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the
possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the
current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after
fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the
hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 121.
1077
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
tr
t [s] = k
i
2
-1
in >
EQUATION1197 V2 EN (Equation 121)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr
and cr must be given, see equation 122:
tr
t [s] = k
i
pr
- cr
in >
EQUATION1198 V2 EN (Equation 122)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
1078
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1079
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1080
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 899: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1081
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
Table 900: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
1082
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 901: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 902: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
10.0% or 180 ms
A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1083
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
Table 903: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
A whichever is greater
t = P k
( I - 1)
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
1084
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 904: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual
overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
1 whichever is greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 905: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1085
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
Table 906: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
1086
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
1087
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
1088
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070750 V2 EN
1089
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070751 V2 EN
1090
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070752 V2 EN
1091
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070753 V2 EN
1092
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070817 V2 EN
1093
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070818 V2 EN
1094
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070819 V2 EN
1095
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070820 V2 EN
1096
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070821 V2 EN
1097
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070822 V2 EN
1098
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070823 V2 EN
1099
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070824 V2 EN
1100
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070825 V2 EN
1101
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
A070826 V2 EN
1102
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070827 V2 EN
1103
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
1104
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
1105
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
1106
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
1107
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
1108
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary
Section 26 Glossary
26.1 Glossary
AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for
serial communication
1109
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit
information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
1110
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary
1111
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary
1112
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary
1113
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary
1114
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary
1115
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary
1116
Technical Manual
1117
Contact us
www.abb.com/substationautomation